JP2020000635A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can further enhance amusement of a performance.SOLUTION: During an SPSP ready-to-win, a premium button performance and a big winning operation performance for notifying that a big winning is confirmed are executed. From the start of the premier button performance, a board lamp 25 and a frame lamp 37 are controlled to emit light in rainbow color so that the entire game machine appears to emit light in rainbow color. In accordance with the big winning operation performance, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are controlled to emit light in rainbow color so that the entire game machine appears to emit light in rainbow color. The premium button performance and the big winning operation performance can be executed once each during one variation performance, but light emission of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 in rainbow color can be executed multiple times.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and performs an effect based on the determination result.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has won a start port and a special game is to be executed, a special symbol display device displays a determination result after a special symbol is variably displayed on a special symbol display. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, in a predetermined image display device, a decorative symbol is variably displayed along with a variable display of a special symbol, and the determination result is displayed as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

JP 2014-183903 A

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the amusement of the effect.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of performance.

  The present invention has the following features to attain the object mentioned above.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable body, a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on game information obtained by the obtaining means, A special game execution means for executing the special game when it is determined that the special game is to be executed, and a symbol control means for notifying the judgment result of the judgment means by stopping and displaying the symbols after variably displaying the symbols; And effect control means for controlling the effect, wherein the effect control means, during the variable display of the symbol, as a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, a first notification effect, The first notification effect is different from the first notification effect, and the second notification effect for operating the movable body can be executed once each with a different execution timing, and the light emitting unit emits light with a specific emission color. Thereby being capable of performing emission effect, perform the emission effect in association with the first notification effect, it executes emission effect in association with the second notification effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the effect.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 The figure which illustrates a mode that makes the left panel lamp 25A or the right panel lamp 25B emit light in rainbow colors. The figure which illustrates a mode that the starting port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors. The figure which illustrates the light emitting element with which directing thing 7 is provided The figure which illustrates a mode that the left side lamp 37A of the frame lamp 37, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C emit light in rainbow colors. Schematic plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of various determinations performed in gaming machine 1 FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image acoustic control board 140. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of hit notification, and the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of loss notification. Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects in the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of a cut-in effect performed during SPSP Reach 1 Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of the relationship between the content of SPSP Reach 1 and the mode of the cut-in effect Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of a button effect executed at the end of SPSP Reach 1 Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of lamp control in a variable effect in which a big hit is notified via a premium cut-in and a premium button effect Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in a case where an effect notifying that a jackpot has been determined from the start of the variable effect to the end of the normal reach is not executed Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the time of SP reach development to the time of the omission notification or SPSP reach Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example until button suggestion effect is executed via premium cut-in after SPSP reach 1 development (until immediately before start of button effect in SPSP reach 1) Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the start of the premier button effect to the start of the jackpot game after the jackpot is announced at the end of SPSP Reach 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example until button suggestion effect is executed via strong cut-in after SPSP reach 1 development (until immediately before start of button effect in SPSP reach 1) Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example from the start of a strong button effect in SPSP Reach 1 to the notification of a hit at the end of SPSP Reach 1 Explanatory drawing for explaining a modified example of the premium cut-in Explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example in which a premium cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on another cut-in image. Explanatory drawing for explaining a specific example in which the hold icon 54 changes from green to the premier mode by the hold icon change effect. Explanatory drawing for explaining an example of an icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination that occurs when the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state. Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier by the icon change effect Explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier by the icon change effect Description for describing an example of a determination ratio of a change pattern of the icon change effect that finally changes the icon to the premium mode in a variable effect that can execute SPSP reach 1 via the normal reach and the SP reach in the normal game state. Figure Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 in FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the first start-up switch processing in step S21 in FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the second startup port switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern determination process in step S310 in FIG. 35 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in effect control board 130 Detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. 38 Detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step S13 in FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command receiving process in step S15 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of final stop symbol determination processing in step S159 of FIG. 41 Detailed flowchart of the announcement effect pattern determination process in step S160 in FIG. 41 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control board 150.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Schematic configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. As exemplified in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with an accessory or the like for winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. Have been.

  When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper plate 28 are guided to a launching device (not shown), and the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20 is applied. Fired to the game area 10. The game area 10 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown). The fired game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10 and contacts the game nail, the windmill, and the like. The player falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. The firing of the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing award balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 disposed close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are disposed below the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

  When the player makes a so-called "left hit" while maintaining the state in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player makes a so-called “right hit” while maintaining the state where the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the left-hit game ball as a winning or judgment accessory. In addition, in the passage path of the right-hit game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, and the electric tulip 17 are provided as a winning or judging-related accessory. Is provided. Therefore, when the player makes a right strike, basically, no game ball wins in the first starting port 11.

  In the process of flowing down along the game board 2, the game ball hit into the game area 10 enters one of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the special winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14. To win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not been won are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first starting port 11 as a first starting area is a starting port that is always open, and the second starting port 12 as a second starting area is operated with an electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins, or when a game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is provided. It is determined whether or not to execute, and a “special symbol” indicating the determination result is displayed on a display 4 (see FIG. 7) described later. Here, the “special symbol” is a symbol used for notifying the player of the above determination result with the elapse of the determined fluctuation time (described later). In the present embodiment, the special symbol is variably displayed on the display 4 during the fluctuation time. Then, a special symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed as the variation time elapses. Note that when a game ball wins in the first starting port (or the second starting port) during the change display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 sets the maximum number of holdings of the above determination (four in the present embodiment). ) Is held up to the upper limit.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and on condition that a game ball is won on the second starting port 12. The determination to be performed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. At the opening of the special winning opening 13, a plate for opening and closing the special winning opening 13 is provided. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a special symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the big hit game in which the plate is operated to open the big winning port 13 is executed. Is done. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by performing a right hit during the jackpot game as compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

  Inside the special winning opening 13, for example, a V region 195 (see FIG. 1) is provided so as to be visible to a player. The V region 195 is a region that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination, and is a region that is normally closed by a blade member (not shown) that is rotatable about the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. In the state where the V region 195 is closed, even if a game ball enters the special winning opening 13 during the jackpot game, the game ball is guided to the loss region (not shown) by the blade member, so that the game is performed. The sphere cannot pass through the V region 195. In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, the blade member returns to the closed position for closing the V region 195 after maintaining the open position for opening the V region 195 for a set time (for example, 29.5 seconds). While both the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are temporarily changed from the difficult passage state where the game ball is hard to pass to the easy passage state where the game ball is easy to pass, the game ball can pass through the V region 195. Become. Whenever a game ball passes through the V region 195, the game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116 (described later). In the following description, detection of a game ball by the V winning opening switch 116 is referred to as “V winning”.

  The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed position in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1) and an open position in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). The posture can be changed.

  The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not the second starting port 12 is opened. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed position after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintain the open position for the specified time is performed a specified number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas a state in which the game ball is easy to pass by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open similarly to the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Note that, unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

[Explanation of game state]
Here, a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the gaming state according to the special symbol determination, a low probability state in which the probability determined to be a big hit is the first probability (for example, about 1/319), and a probability determined to be the big hit is smaller than the first probability. There is a high probability state with a high second probability (eg, about 1/115) (see FIG. 9A).

  In addition, the game state related to the normal symbol determination includes a non-time reduction state and a time reduction state. In the time reduction state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively higher than in the non-time reduction state (for example, 1 / 1.1). In addition, in the time saving state, when it is determined that a hit has occurred, the time during which the electric tulip 17 operates (that is, the opening time of the second starting port 12) is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds × 3 times). Normally, the fluctuation time of the symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the symbol is usually determined, and the hit is achieved with a relatively high probability, and the second start port 12 is opened 1.8 times × 3 times to win the game ball. Easy to do. Further, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the non-time reduction state.

  On the other hand, the non-time saving state has a relatively low probability of being determined as a hit in the ordinary symbol determination as compared with the time saving state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when the hit is determined is relatively short. (For example, 0.1 second × 1 time), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-time saving state, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the probability of hitting is relatively low even if the normal symbol determination is performed, and the second starting port 12 is opened only 0.1 second × 1 time. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 12.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is initially set to a low probability state and a non-saving time state (a so-called normal gaming state), and is set to a high probability state and a time saving time at the end of a jackpot game (a normal gaming state as a gaming state). A state (so-called probable game state) or a low probability state and a time-saving state (so-called time-saving game state) is set. Specifically, if a V prize is won during a jackpot game, the game is set to a certain change game state at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if no V prize is won during the big hit game, the time saving game state is set at the end of the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, if a V-prize is won during the jackpot game, it is determined that the game state is set to the probable change game state at the end of the jackpot game.

  If the game is shifted to the probable change game state and, for example, 168 special symbol determinations have been made but it is not determined to execute the jackpot game at least once, a special result indicating the determination result (loss) of the 168th special symbol determination is performed. Immediately after the symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state. It should be noted that the game may be controlled in the probable change game state until a very large number (for example, 10,000) of special symbol determinations are performed. In this case, in effect, the game is continuously controlled in the certain-variable game state until the next big hit game is started.

  If the game shifts to the time-saving game state and, for example, the special symbol determination is performed 100 times but it is not determined to execute the jackpot game at least once, the special result indicating the determination result (loss) of the 100th special symbol determination is performed. Immediately after the symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect is performed in any one of the three effect modes except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, an effect is performed in an effect mode called a normal mode. In addition, when the game is controlled in the probable change game state, an effect is performed in an effect mode called a probable change mode, and when the game is controlled in the time reduction game state, an effect is performed in an effect mode called a time reduction mode. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the certain-change game state or the time-saving game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game, during the period of notifying the end of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as “ending period”). The following effect display is performed. That is, during the ending period during the big hit game, an effect display for notifying the end of the big hit game by notifying the effect mode corresponding to the game state of the transition destination is displayed. This effect display is erased immediately before the end of the ending period (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and accordingly, the effect mode is switched to the effect mode corresponding to the game state of the transition destination. Thereafter, with the end of the ending period, the game state is set to the transfer destination game state. Thereby, the big hit game ends.
Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the probable change gaming state or the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, immediately before shifting to the normal gaming state, the effect mode corresponding to the current gaming state is switched to the normal mode. As an example, the mode is switched to the normal mode immediately before the special symbol related to the last special symbol determination executed in the current gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state is stopped and displayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before). Thereafter, the normal game state is set in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol which has been displayed in a variable manner.

  In each of the effect modes, for example, the type of background image that can be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol and the type of effect sound (for example, music) that can be output are different from each other. For this reason, the player can recognize the current effect mode (that is, the current game state) based on, for example, the type of the background image.

  For example, in normal mode, a background image representing a peaceful city landscape is displayed, in probable mode, a background image representing a devastated city landscape is displayed, and in time reduction mode, a landscape of a quiet night city is displayed. A background image is displayed.

  Note that the probability change mode and the time saving mode are different from the normal mode, and a remaining number image for notifying the remaining number of special symbol determinations that can be executed before shifting to another game state is displayed.

[Example of configuration of production means of gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, on the game board 2 or the frame member 3, a liquid crystal display device 5, an effect member 7, a speaker 24, and a board lamp 25 (25 A, 25 B) are provided for performing various effects. Is provided. The frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 8) not shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a rainbow is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter, referred to as the “liquid crystal screen 5”), for example, during the change display of the special symbol, in order to notify that the special symbol is determined to be a big hit. An effect image of a color is displayed, and the effect means (specifically, the effect part 7, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37) capable of emitting light are emitted in rainbow colors. In addition, in order to notify that the game mode shifts to the probable change game state (that is, the probable change mode) immediately after the end of the jackpot game, for example, the following effects may be performed during the jackpot game. For example, a rainbow effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order to notify that the game state is set to the certain-variable game state in accordance with the V winning during the “round game” during the opening period of the special winning opening 13. For example, the illuminating effect means can emit light in rainbow colors. In addition, the following effects may be performed to notify that various types of information (described later) related to the held special symbol determination include a hold determined to be a big hit. For example, before the variable display notifying the big hit is started (for example, during the variable display before the variable display notifying the big hit), a rainbow effect image can be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or the light emission can be performed. Or the above-mentioned effect means emits light in rainbow colors.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in order to notify that it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination, to shift to the probability change game state after the big hit game, or to be determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination performed thereafter , “Rainbow colors” are used.

  In the present embodiment, white, blue, green, red, and iridescent colors are used as colors that notify the level of the possibility of a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “reliability”), and the reliability of each color is higher in this order. The rainbow color has a reliability of 100% and is used only when a big hit occurs, and is not used when a losing occurs. It should be noted that the color for notifying the level of the reliability may be used as a color for notifying the possibility of shifting to the certain-variable gaming state (that is, the certain-variable mode) immediately after the end of the big hit game during the big hit game. The possibility of shifting to the probable change game state may be, for example, higher in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. Also, during the big hit game, the rainbow color is used when shifting to the probable change game state immediately after the end of the big hit game, and may not be used when shifting to the time saving game state.

  In the following, it is advantageous for the player (it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination), or it is always advantageous for the player after that (transition to the probable change game state after the big hit game, or It is assumed that "rainbow" is used as a color for notifying that a big hit is determined in a special symbol determination performed thereafter, but another single color (for example, red) is used instead of the rainbow color Alternatively, another composite color (for example, a composite color of red, yellow, and white) may be used.

  The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image. As shown in FIG. 1, the liquid crystal screen 5, which is a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, is provided at a position where the liquid crystal display device 5 is easily recognized by a player. On the liquid crystal screen 5, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. The decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is composed of numerals and the like, and starts the variable display with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and stops and displays with the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed informs the player of the same content as the content to which the special symbol is stopped and notified to the player (that is, the result of the special symbol determination). Things.

  Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, effect images such as CG or animation characters and items are displayed. The details of these effect images will be described later. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like in synchronism with or asynchronously with the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and performs sound effects.

  The board lamp 25 is a general term for a plurality of light-emitting elements (for example, full-color LEDs) provided on the game board 2. The board lamp 25 includes a left-board lamp 25A, a right-board lamp 25B, a start-up lamp 38, a light-emitting element (see FIG. 4) built in the director 7, a special winning opening lamp (not shown), and a V winning lamp ( (Not shown)).

  In the following description, controlling a light emitting element (for example, a full-color LED) to a lighting state or a “blinking” state is collectively referred to as “light emission”. “Blinking” in this embodiment may be any state as long as the state is controlled between a lighting state and a light-off state, and the length of the blinking time and the light-off time does not matter. The blinking is controlled, for example, such that the light-on state and the light-off state are alternately controlled at relatively short time intervals (for example, 0.1 second intervals), and to the light-on state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). This includes a state in which the light is turned off for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds) and then turned on again.

  The board lamp 25 emits, for example, a color that indicates the degree of reliability related to the display of a change during execution or the determination of a held special symbol during the change display of the special symbol. That is, the board lamp 25 is configured as a presentation means having a function of suggesting the reliability during the fluctuation display of the special symbol. However, the board lamp 25 of the present embodiment does not have the above function in all the effects during the variable display of the special symbol, but adopts a configuration having the above function in some effects described later. That is, the board lamp 25 is configured as an effect means for implicitly suggesting the reliability only to some players who know the gaming machine 1 during the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the variation display of the special symbol, the board lamp 25 performs the mini-character production even if a “mini-character production” (described later) that displays a character indicating that it has been determined to be a big hit is executed. Is emitted in a mode that does not suggest the reliability of the BGM (for example, a mode in which it appears in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM for the normal mode output from the speaker 24). On the other hand, for example, at the time of executing a cut-in effect described later during the change display of the special symbol, the board lamp 25 emits light to indicate the degree of reliability of the cut-in effect. As described above, the board lamp 25 does not have the above function in all effects during the variable display of the special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of strangeness and to motivate the player to be interested in learning the gaming machine 1 deeply. Note that, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 37 described later employs a configuration having the above-described function only in a part of the effects described later, similarly to the board lamp 25. As a result, the frame lamp 37 is configured as an effect means for implicitly indicating the reliability to only some of the players during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, similarly to the board lamp 25.

  Of the board lamps 25, the left board lamp 25 </ b> A is provided on the left side of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the game board 2, and the right board lamp 25 </ b> B is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the game board 2. The left panel lamp 25A has a configuration in which seven sections are arranged in the vertical direction (see FIG. 1). Each of the seven sections is made of a resin that transmits and diffuses light, and a light emitting element (full color LED) is provided inside each section. The light emitting element provided inside each section can emit light of any color (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, purple, etc.). By causing each light emitting element to emit light of a desired color, each of the seven sections constituting the left panel lamp 25A "lights" in one light emission color. For example, by causing the light-emitting elements provided in each of the seven sections of the left lamp 25A to simultaneously emit light of the same color (for example, blue), the entire left lamp 25A is made of the same color (for example, blue). It can emit light. Further, for example, the light emitting elements provided in each of the seven sections of the left panel lamp 25A can simultaneously emit light of different colors. Similarly to the left panel lamp 25A, the right panel lamp 25B has a configuration in which seven sections are arranged in the vertical direction, and a light emitting element is provided inside each section.

  With reference to FIG. 2, a method of causing the left lamp 25A or the right lamp 25B to emit rainbow light will be described. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left lamp 25A or the right lamp 25B emits light in a rainbow color. As shown in FIG. 2, for example, when the left panel lamp 25A is illuminated in a rainbow color in order to notify that it is set to a jackpot or a probable changing game state, the sections constituting the left panel lamp 25A are different from each other. By simultaneously emitting light in seven colors (specifically, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, and purple), the left lamp 25A emits rainbow light as a whole. For example, at time t1, seven sections arranged in the vertical direction are sequentially arranged from the top in the order of “red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “light blue”, “blue”, “purple” (rainbow) Are emitted in each of the colors constituting In addition, the color of each section is changed in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red → orange →... Every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) to emit rainbow light. be able to. For example, at the time point t1 + Δt (after 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the time point t1), seven sections arranged in the vertical direction are sequentially arranged from the top in the order of “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “light blue”, “blue” , "Purple" and "red". At time t1 + 2Δt (one second after time t1), the seven sections arranged in the vertical direction are sequentially arranged from the top in the order of “yellow”, “green”, “light blue”, “blue”, “purple”, “purple”. Emit red and orange light.

  Since each section constituting the right panel lamp 25B has the same function as each section constituting the left panel lamp 25A, the right panel lamp 25B also performs light emission control similarly to the left panel lamp 25A, Light can be emitted in rainbow colors.

  The starting port lamp 38 is provided below the second starting port 12 on a game board, for example. The starting port lamp 38 includes one (or a plurality of) light emitting elements. The starting port lamp 38 basically emits light (for example, white) that does not indicate the level of reliability in order to notify that the game ball has won the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Accordingly, light is emitted for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). However, the start-up lamp 38 is rainbow-colored when the icon change effect (described later) for notifying that there is a jackpot or that there is a hold determined to be a jackpot is executed or when it is notified that the game is set to the certain-change game state. Emits light. In addition, when any one of the icon and the hold icon is displayed in a color that indicates the level of reliability, the start-up lamp 38 emits light in a color that indicates the level of reliability.

  Here, a method of causing the starting port lamp 38 to emit light in a rainbow color will be described. FIG. 3 is a diagram exemplifying a state in which the starting port lamp 38 emits light in a rainbow color. As shown in FIG. 3, for example, when the starting port lamp 38 is illuminated in a rainbow color to notify that a jackpot or a probable game state is set, red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → The emission color of the entire starting opening lamp 38 changes every predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the order of purple → red →... Specifically, the starting port lamp 38 emits “red” light at time t1, emits “orange” light at time t1 + Δt (after 0.3 seconds have elapsed from time t1), and emits light at time t1 + 2Δt (0. At 6 seconds), the light is emitted in “yellow”, at time t1 + 3Δt (0.9 seconds after time t1), the light is emitted at “green”, and at time t1 + 4Δt (1.2 seconds after time t1), light blue , And emits blue light at time t1 + 5Δt (1.5 seconds after time t1) and emits purple at time t1 + 6Δt (1.8 seconds after time t1). Thus, the starting port lamp 38 can emit light in a rainbow color over time.

  The stage combination 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2. The stage effect 7 according to the present embodiment is arranged on the upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5 when not operating (see FIG. 1). In the following description, the position of the stage effect 7 arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5 is referred to as an “initial position”. When it is time to operate the stage combination 71, the stage combination 71 moves downward from the initial position by the driving force of the stage combination motor 71, and is arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. ) And FIG. 19 (I)). In the following description, the position of the stage effect 7 arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5 is referred to as an “advance position”. In addition, the stage effect 7 is used for various effects by causing a plurality of built-in light-emitting elements (one of the board lamps 25) to emit light in a plurality of colors or a single color. The presentation role product 7 emits light in a light emission color that does not indicate the level of reliability in order to improve the effect of the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 basically. However, at the time of executing the hit action effect and the third pseudo continuous effect (both will be described later), the staging part 7 is illuminated in rainbow color to notify that it is a big hit. In addition, the staging part 7 may be illuminated in a rainbow color in order to notify that it is set to the certain-variable game state during the big hit game, for example.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram exemplifying a light emitting element included in the stage combination 7. Each light-emitting element built in the production 7 shown in FIG. 4 emits light in seven different colors (specifically, red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue, and purple) at the same time. The accessory 7 emits rainbow light as a whole. The color of each light-emitting element is changed in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red →... Every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the rainbow color is changed at any time. By controlling so that all the constituent colors appear at the same time, it is possible to cause the stage effect 7 to emit a rainbow light.

  The special winning opening lamp (not shown) includes, for example, one (or a plurality of) light emitting elements provided around the special winning opening 13. In order to notify that the game ball has won the special winning opening 13, the special winning opening lamp is white for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) for each winning in response to the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 13. This is a lamp that emits light.

  The V winning lamp (not shown) includes, for example, a plurality of light emitting elements provided around the V region 195. The board surface on the near side (player side) of the V region 195 is made of a transparent member. Light from a V winning lamp provided around the V region 195 passes through the transparent member. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the V region 195 arranged in the special winning opening 13 and the light from the V winning lamp. Each light emitting element constituting the V winning prize lamp also has the same function as each light emitting element constituting the staging part 7, so that the V winning lamp also emits the staging part 7 in a rainbow color. By controlling the light emission, light can be emitted in a rainbow color.

  The V prize lamp emits a rainbow color for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) in accordance with the V prize in order to notify the V prize and to notify that the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the certain-change game state. It is a lamp. When the V winning lamp emits light, the player can visually recognize the light emission, and can recognize that a transition to a certain-variable game state (a certain-variable mode described later) will be made after the big hit game ends.

  The frame lamp 37 is a general term for a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, full color LEDs) provided on the frame member 3. The frame lamp 37 is provided, for example, so as to surround the left peripheral portion of the game board 2 in the frame member 3 and to surround the right peripheral portion of the game board 2 in the frame member 3. A right side lamp 37B, a center lamp 37C provided between the two speakers 24 in the frame member 3, and a button lamp 262 (see FIG. 8).

  The frame lamp 37 basically emits light in a luminescent color that does not indicate the level of reliability in order to improve the effect of the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as in the case of the board lamp 25. It is a lamp that emits light in a light emission color that indicates the degree of reliability when executing a cut-in effect described later.

  The left side lamp 37A, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "frame lamps 37A to 37C") of the frame lamp 37 are each composed of a plurality of light emitting elements. Therefore, the frame lamps 37A to 37C can emit rainbow light.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left side lamp 37A, the right side lamp 37B, and the center lamp 37C of the frame lamp 37 emit light in rainbow colors. As shown in FIG. 5, the left side lamp 37A includes, for example, seven light emitting elements, and each light emitting element emits light, so that a region surrounded by a broken line emits light. For example, at a certain point in time, the seven light-emitting elements of the left side lamp 37A are simultaneously emitted in the order of “red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “light blue”, “blue”, and “purple” from the bottom. As a result, the left side lamp 37A emits rainbow light as a whole. Similarly, the right side lamp 37B also includes seven light emitting elements, and emits light in a rainbow color as a whole by causing each light emitting element to emit light at a certain point in time so that each color constituting the rainbow color appears at the same time. The center lamp 37C of the frame lamp 37 includes, for example, seven light emitting elements, and emits light in such a manner that the respective colors constituting the rainbow color appear simultaneously at a certain point in time, thereby emitting light in the entire rainbow color. . The frame lamps 37A to 37C, like the left and right lamps 25A and 25B, change the color of each light emitting element in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red →. It is changed every time (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, control is performed such that all colors constituting the rainbow color appear at the same time at any time when the emission control in the rainbow color is performed. Accordingly, the frame lamps 37A to 37C can continue to emit light in the rainbow color as a whole at any time when the light emission control in the rainbow color is performed.

  FIG. 6 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the gaming machine 1. The button lamp 262 of the frame lamp 37 is, for example, a lamp built in the effect button 26 in which a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, full color LEDs) are arranged in a circle (see FIG. 6). In the present embodiment, the button lamp 262 is operated during a specific period (specifically, for example, during a “valid period” related to the button effect (to be described later: see FIG. 16)) and during a hit operation effect that is not during the valid period ( Light emission is suppressed and extinguished except in the case described later: see FIG. The “valid period” is, for example, a period during which an operation on the effect button 26 is valid. In the present embodiment, a “button effect” is performed in which the button lamp 262 emits light in one of white, red, and rainbow colors at the start of the effective period to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26. . In the present embodiment, the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits white or red light may be executed a plurality of times during the single variable display of the special symbol. However, the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits light in a rainbow color can be executed only once during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the big hit. The button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits light in a rainbow color is different from the button effect in which the button lamp 262 emits light in another color in that the appearance timing is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Although the detailed mode of the button effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the light emission control of the button lamp 262 (that is, the button effect) ends with the end of the valid period. The validity period is determined in accordance with the operation of the effect button 26 during the validity period, or as the end timing of the predetermined validity period (for example, when three seconds have elapsed from the start of the validity period). finish. Thus, the button lamp 262 is different from the other lamps and the panel lamp 25 constituting the frame lamp 37 in that the button lamp 262 has a function of notifying that it is in the valid period. Note that the button lamp 262 may be controlled to emit rainbow light during a period excluding the effective period (for example, during the above-described winning operation effect).

  By causing each light emitting element of the button lamp 262 to emit light so that all colors constituting the rainbow color appear at the same time, the effect button 26 emits rainbow light as a whole. Note that the button lamp 262 changes the color of each light-emitting element in the order of red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → red →... Like the left lamp 25A and the right lamp 25B. For example, every 0.5 seconds). At this time, control is performed such that all colors constituting the rainbow color appear at the same time at any time when the emission control in the rainbow color is performed. Thus, the effect button 26 can continuously emit light in the rainbow color as a whole at any time when the light emission control in the rainbow color is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light, the entire game machine (more specifically, the entire game board 2 and the entire frame member 3) appears to emit light around the liquid crystal screen 5.

[Configuration Example of Input Means of Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 6, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for a player to make an input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by an operation (for example, pressing) by the player.

  The effect button 26 has a normal state in which the upper surface is substantially at the same height as the upper surface of the frame member 3, and a protrusion in which the upper surface protrudes upward by a predetermined height (for example, 10 cm) from the upper surface of the frame member 3. Control to change the height between the state and the state is made possible. The effect button 26 can be operated regardless of the height between the normal state and the protruding state. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation or a cursor movement, and has an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, an effect may be performed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. Further, the gaming machine 1 can perform volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by operating the effect button 26 (or the effect key 27).

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information relating to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 7, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first It has a special symbol hold display 43, a second special symbol hold display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol hold display 46, a game state display 47, a round display 48, and the like.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 changes and displays the special symbol and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby performing the first special symbol determination. Is notified. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby performing the second special symbol determination. Is notified. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, the special symbol determination result is "big hit" as a special symbol, or the special symbol determination result is "losing". Is stopped and displayed.

  The first special symbol hold display 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to as “special 1 hold number”). The second special symbol hold display 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to as “special 2 hold number”).

  When the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the ordinary symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination by changing and displaying the “ordinary symbol” and then stopping and displaying the ordinary symbol indicating the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination. . “Normal symbol” is a symbol used to display a variation for a variation time (for example, 25 seconds) determined by the ordinary symbol determination and to notify the player of the determination result as the variation time elapses. The ordinary symbol hold display 46 displays the number of ordinary symbols to be reserved. The gaming state display 47 displays the gaming state at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine 1. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round display 48 displays the number of rounds of the big hit game.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as “first special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol indicator 42 is referred to as “second special symbol”. May be distinguished.

[Description of jackpot types]
Next, the types of jackpots in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 and the jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol indicating “6R probable change” or a jackpot symbol indicating “6R time saving” stops on the first special symbol indicator 41 (FIG. 9). (B)). Also, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 12 and a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol indicating “16R sure change” or a jackpot symbol indicating “16R time saving” stops on the second special symbol display 42.

  When the big hit symbol indicating the 6R probability change or the big hit symbol indicating the 6R time saving is stopped, a predetermined condition (for example, when the number of winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 13 reaches 10 as the big hit game of the round number 6). Or 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13), the round game in which the special winning opening 13 is opened is performed six times.

  When the big hit symbol indicating the 16R probability change or the big hit symbol indicating the 6R time saving is stopped, 16 round games are performed as the big hit game having 16 rounds.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot pertaining to the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R probability change and the jackpot symbol indicating the 16R probability change is a jackpot capable of winning a V, and the jackpot relating to the jackpot symbol indicating the 6R time reduction and the jackpot symbol indicating the 16R time reduction wins the V. It is a difficult jackpot.

  During a jackpot game corresponding to a jackpot capable of winning a V, the player basically wins the V, and the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to a certain-variable game state (high-probability state and time-saving state).

  During a jackpot game corresponding to a jackpot in which it is difficult to win a V, the player does not basically receive the V, and the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to a time saving game state (low probability state and time saving state). In the same manner, when a V-prize is not performed during the jackpot game relating to the V-prize jackpot, the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the time-saving game state.

  As described above, the jackpot capable of winning the V prize is a jackpot accompanied by the transition to the high-probability state, and can be said to be a jackpot advantageous to the player as compared with the jackpot which is difficult to win the V without the transition to the high-probability state.

  In the following description, a jackpot that allows a V prize is simply called a “probable change hit”, and a jackpot that is difficult to win a V is simply called a “time saving hit”.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1 and outline of various determinations performed in gaming machine 1]
With reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an example of a configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1 and an outline of various determinations performed in the gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of various determinations performed in gaming machine 1.

  On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. As illustrated in FIG. 8, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is a game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game such as various determinations and command transmission, and controls the production based on the command received from the game control board 100. And an image and sound control board 140 for controlling effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 for controlling effects by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured by one board.

[Configuration Example of Game Control Board 100]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and a random number circuit 104. The main CPU 101 performs various calculation processes related to the determination and the number of payout prize balls based on a program or the like stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned program, or as a work area for data processing. The random number circuit 104 generates, for example, a jackpot random number used for determining whether a jackpot or a loss.

  On the game control board 100, a first starting port switch 111, a second starting port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning opening switch 115, a V winning opening switch 116, a discharging switch 117, a big winning opening The control unit 118, the V winning opening control unit 119, the normal winning opening switch 120, and the displays 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has four ordinary winning opening switches 14 because it has four ordinary winning opening switches 14. In FIG. 8, however, only one ordinary winning opening switch 120 is provided. Notation.

  The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first starting port 11, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second starting port 12, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second start-up port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. I do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed the gate 16 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The special winning opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the special winning opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 115 is guided to a V region 195 or a loss region (not illustrated) by a blade member (not illustrated) provided inside the special winning opening 13. The V winning opening switch 116 detects that a game ball has passed through the V area 195 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The discharge switch 117 detects that the game ball has passed through the loss area, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116, an effect image (for example, a character “V” accompanied by an effect image of “rainbow”) for notifying the V winning is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Will be displayed. Along with this display, a V winning lamp (not shown) emits light in a rainbow color for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and emits light in a light emission mode (for example, blinking in yellow) corresponding to an effect during a jackpot game. The left and right board lamps 25A and 25B (hereinafter collectively referred to as "board lamps 25A and 25B") and the starting port lamp 38 start emitting light in a rainbow color for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the V prize and the transition to the probable change mode (that is, the probable change game state) immediately after the end of the jackpot game by emitting light in rainbow colors. Lighting control of the effect means (director 7, frame lamp 37, etc.) other than the board lamps 25 </ b> A and 25 </ b> B and the starter lamp 38 is continued in the light emission mode corresponding to the effect during the jackpot game. Note that all of the effect means that can be controlled to emit light may emit light in a rainbow color in accordance with the emission control of the V winning lamp in the rainbow color.

  In the present embodiment, the V winning lamp is controlled to emit light in a rainbow color in accordance with the display of the effect image indicating the V winning, and is not emitted in the rainbow color in other effects. Thus, a function of notifying the V winning lamp to the V winning lamp is provided. Note that the V winning lamp may be controlled to emit light in a rainbow color in accordance with an effect other than the effect relating to the V winning (for example, a hit operation effect described later (see FIG. 21B)).

  The special winning opening control unit 118 opens and closes the special winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the plate closing the special winning opening 13 so as to be able to transmit a drive based on a control signal from the game control board 100. I do. The V winning opening control unit 119 opens and closes the V region based on a control signal from the game control board 100 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a blade member that opens and closes the V region 195 so as to be able to transmit a drive.

  The normal winning opening switch 120 detects that a game ball has won the normal winning opening 14 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  When the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, or the normal winning port switch 120, the game ball wins. A payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board. Although a detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies game balls to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out game balls from the ball tank.

  The main CPU 101 obtains “various random numbers for special symbol determination” as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and performs the first special symbol determination using the various random numbers obtained. Execute. In addition, various random numbers for special symbol determination are acquired at the timing when the detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 112, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired various random numbers.

In the present embodiment, for example, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a variation pattern random number, and a reach random number are used as “various random numbers for special symbol determination”.
The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether it is a jackpot or a loss.
The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of the big hit symbol when it is determined to be a big hit. In the present embodiment, the combination of the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state shifted immediately after the end of the jackpot game is different for each big hit symbol (see FIG. 9B). For this reason, it can be said that the symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot.
The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation time, which is a time from when the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner to when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the pattern in which the special symbol is variably displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation pattern”) differs for each variation time, and thus the variation pattern random number can be said to be a random number for determining the variation pattern.
The reach random number is used to determine a variation pattern when a loss is determined, a variation pattern for a loss exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds), and a variation pattern group other than the variation pattern group (that is, less than a specific number of seconds). (Variation pattern group for loss) from which to determine the variation pattern.

  Further, the main CPU 101 obtains a normal symbol random number at a timing when the detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and executes a normal symbol determination using the obtained normal symbol random number. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 12, and is, for example, a random number generated using a random counter provided in the main RAM 103. When the main CPU 101 acquires the normal symbol random number, the main CPU 101 determines whether the acquired ordinary symbol random number matches a determination value assigned to the determination result of opening the second opening 12 as a determination value to be compared with the ordinary symbol random number. It is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12 based on the above.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers are generated by using the random number circuit 104, and various random numbers for special symbol determination other than the jackpot random numbers are generated by software using a random counter provided in the main RAM 103.

  Various determination values for comparison with various random numbers for special symbol determination are stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. For example, in the main ROM 102, a jackpot determination table (not shown) in which a determination value to be compared with the jackpot random number is previously assigned to one of “big hit” and “losing” is stored in advance. For example, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired jackpot random numbers and the jackpot determination table to determine whether the determination result of the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36) is “big hit” or “losing”. Is determined before the result of the determination is notified. When the jackpot random number matches the determination value assigned to “big hit”, the main CPU 101 determines that the big hit has occurred.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, “0-65535” is set as the determination value to be compared with the jackpot random number (see FIG. 9A). In the jackpot determination table for the low probability state (the jackpot determination table for the low probability), “0 to 204” is assigned to “big hit”, and “205 to 65335” is assigned to “loss”. (Ie, the jackpot probability is about 1/319). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination table for the high probability state), “0 to 570” is assigned to “big hit”, and “571 to 65535” is assigned to “losing”. Assigned (ie jackpot probability about 1/115).

  For example, in the main ROM 102, a "symbol determination table" (not shown) and a "big hit variation pattern table" (not shown) are stored in advance as tables used when it is determined that a big hit has occurred. In addition, as a table used when it is determined that a loss has occurred, a “reach determination table” (not shown) and a “variation pattern table for loss” (not shown) are stored in advance.

  The “symbol determination table” is a table in which a determination value to be compared with a symbol random number is assigned in advance to one of a plurality of (two types in the present embodiment) big hit symbols. For example, the main CPU 101 determines the type of the jackpot symbol based on which of the jackpot symbols the acquired symbol random number matches with the judgment value assigned to the jackpot symbol following the determination of the jackpot symbol.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is set as the determination value to be compared with the symbol random number (see FIG. 9B). In the symbol determination table relating to the first special symbol (symbol determination table for the first starting opening), “0 to 53” is assigned to “6R sure change” (determination ratio 54%), and “6R time saving” On the other hand, “54 to 99” is assigned (determination ratio 46%). Further, in the symbol determination table relating to the second special symbol (symbol determination table for the second starting opening), “0 to 82” is assigned to “16R certain change” (determination rate 83%), and “16R time reduction” "83-99" is assigned to the "" (determination ratio 17%).

  The “big hit variation pattern table” and the “losing variation pattern table” are based on which of the obtained variation pattern random numbers matches the determination value compared with the variation pattern random numbers. It is a table for determining one variation pattern.

  The “reach determination table” is a table for determining whether to select a fluctuation pattern from a loss fluctuation pattern group exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds). Whether to select a variation pattern from a loss variation group exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) based on which of the obtained reach random numbers matches the determination value included in the reach determination table Is determined. In the present embodiment, as the number of suspensions during execution of the special symbol determination is larger, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern from the loss variation pattern group exceeding a specific number of seconds (hereinafter, referred to as “reach ratio”) is reduced. It is set in advance (see FIG. 9C).

  Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is preset as a determination value for comparison with the reach random number, when the number of reserved special symbol determinations at the time of executing the first special symbol determination is 0 to 1 ( Hereinafter, “0 to 1” is assigned. “0 to 14” is assigned to the determination result of determining from the loss variation pattern group exceeding a specific number of seconds. In addition, “15 to 99” is assigned to a determination result that a determination is made from a group other than the variation pattern group (that is, a reach ratio of 15%, see FIG. 9C). When the number of reserved special symbol determinations at the time of executing the first special symbol determination is two or three, the reach ratio is 5%.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9 (D), in the present embodiment, the variation patterns A1 to A14 are prepared in advance as the variation pattern for the big hit of the first special symbol in the case where the normal special game state is controlled. Further, as loss patterns, variation patterns H1 to H11 exceeding a specific number of seconds and variation patterns H12 to H14 exceeding a specific number of seconds are prepared in advance.

  In the present embodiment, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is determined by the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130. The variation effect pattern is the basis (scenario) of the configuration of the “variation effect”. Here, the “variable effect” is an effect based on the result of the special symbol determination, and is a general term of the effect performed from the time when the special symbol starts the variable display to the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The fluctuating effects include a fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 501 and the small symbols 502, and effects using various lamps (for example, the board lamp 25) and the speaker 24. A specific effect mode of the variable effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 and the like.

  In the present embodiment, a fluctuation effect pattern that cannot execute a reach effect (described later) that is expected to be a big hit is determined corresponding to a loss fluctuation pattern of a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) or less. You. In addition, a variation effect pattern that can execute a reach effect is determined corresponding to a loss variation pattern exceeding a specific number of seconds. For this reason, the determination using the reach random number is substantially a process of determining the presence or absence of the reach effect. In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a reach effect can be executed even if a variable effect pattern is determined corresponding to any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns (that is, the ratio of jackpot notification via the reach effect is 100). %).

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the larger the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the larger the determination value to be compared with the fluctuation pattern random number in the fluctuation pattern table for big hits. Also, in the loss variation pattern table, as the variation time of the special symbol is shorter, the larger the determination value to be compared with the variation pattern random number is assigned. For this reason, in the case of a big hit, the change time of the special symbol is easily determined to be a relatively long change pattern. Further, in the case of a loss, the variation time of the special symbol is easily determined to be a relatively short variation pattern, and the variation time of the special symbol is not easily determined to be a relatively long variation pattern.

(Configuration Example of Main RAM 103)
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of the main RAM 103 in the game control board 100 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 10, in the main RAM 103, a storage area for determination 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, a fourth reserved storage area 1034, and a first reserved storage area 1034. A reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first hold storage area 1031 to the fourth hold storage area 1034 store various kinds of information related to the first special symbol determination in order from the first hold storage area 1031 each time a game ball wins in the first starting port 11. Area. The first hold storage area 1035 to the fourth hold storage area 1038 store various kinds of information related to the second special symbol determination sequentially from the first hold storage area 1035 every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 12. Area.

  For example, even if a game ball wins in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 during a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or during a jackpot game, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol are immediately performed. Can not. In such a situation, the main CPU 101 stores various information related to the special symbol determination in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 as information indicating suspension of the special symbol determination. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a fluctuating manner, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the jackpot game is not being performed, the main CPU 101 transmits the acquired random numbers and the like to the starting port where the gaming ball has won. Immediately after the data is stored in the first hold storage area (1031 or 1035) corresponding to the storage, the data is shifted to the determination storage area 1030.

  For example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 in a state where information is not stored in any of the first hold storage area 1031 to the fourth hold storage area 1034, the first special symbol acquired by this win The various information related to the determination is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 which is the highest order of the empty entry. Further, for example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 in a state where information is stored in the first hold storage area 1031 and the second hold storage area 1032, the first special symbol determination acquired by the winning is determined. Such various information is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033, which is the highest level of the empty entry.

  Further, for example, “prior determination information” is also stored in the hold storage areas 1031 to 1038. In the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the starting opening, based on a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number, a preliminary determination for determining whether or not a jackpot is performed prior to a special symbol determination is performed. This is performed (step S2109 in FIG. 33, step S2209 in FIG. 34). The pre-judgment information is information obtained by the pre-judgment, "winning start opening information", information indicating whether or not a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, information indicating the type of the jackpot symbol, a special pattern fluctuation pattern , Information indicating a game state, and the like. The “prize start opening information” is acquired when each of the random numbers stored in the same hold storage area wins any one of the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12. Is information indicating whether The preliminary determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random numbers used for the preliminary determination.

  When the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 during the execution of the first special symbol determination, the information stored in the entry lower than the second reserved storage area 1031 becomes 1 Each entry is shifted up. For example, if the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 while the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, The information stored in the second reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. In this case, prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is performed with priority. Therefore, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, various kinds of information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 are shifted to the determination storage area 1030. When the second special symbol determination is not suspended, that is, when only the first special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

[Configuration Example of Effect Control Board 130]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, an RTC (real time clock) 134, and a random number circuit 135. The sub CPU 131 performs an arithmetic process when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

  The sub CPU 131 sets the effect contents of various effects based on the game information on the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, and the like transmitted from the game control board 100. For example, the effect content to be set may be determined by lottery using various “effect control random numbers” for determining the effect content. In some cases, the sub CPU 131 may receive an input of operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 and set the effect contents according to the operation information. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect with the set effect contents to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  The “random number for effect control” is, for example, a random number that is appropriately updated in the random number circuit 135 when a timer interrupt process (described later) by the effect control board 130 is not performed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by generating the random number for effect control using the random number circuit 135, the processing load on the sub CPU 131 is reduced as compared with the case where the sub CPU 131 generates the random number.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 may perform a random number update process for appropriately updating various effect control random numbers using a loop count or the like added by “1” each time the effect control board 130 performs a timer interrupt process.

[Configuration Example of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image acoustic control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal screen 5 and effect sound output control of the speaker 24. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the image and sound control board 140 includes a centralized CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, a sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, a sound ROM 146, and an SDRAM 147. , CGROM 148, and VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 sends the image data stored in the CGROM 148 to the VDP 142 based on the programs stored in the control ROM 144, various tables such as a display list creation table, commands received from the effect control board 130, and the like. Give an instruction to display. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames, and includes a type of an image to be drawn, a position (coordinate) at which the image is drawn, a display priority, a display magnification, and a rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list creation table is a table used to create this display list.

  The overall CPU 141 also instructs the audio DSP 143 to output the audio data stored in the audio ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is constituted by a mask ROM, and stores a control program of the overall CPU 141 and a display list generation program for generating a display list.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the overall CPU 141 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing an effect associated with a change display of a special symbol, an effect associated with a jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes sprite data (one image data) composed of a group of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. Movie data consisting of a collection of. The pixel information includes color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transmittance of an image. The CGROM 148 stores, without compression, palette data and the like in which color number information for designating color numbers and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493, and the like.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the centralized CPU 141. The development storage area 1492 stores image data read out from the CGROM 148 and decompressed. The liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 is used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The LCD screen frame buffer 1493 is a double-buffer type memory having two buffers, and while the image data stored in one buffer is output for display, the next image data is stored in the other buffer. By drawing, the drawing and display of the image data are performed.

  The VDP 142 expands the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148, and stores the expanded image data in the expansion storage area 1492. In addition, the VDP 142 performs a drawing process on the liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 using the image data stored in the development storage area 1492 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating a color of an image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer in the VRAM 149, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal screen 5.

  The audio DSP 143 is connected to an audio ROM 146 that stores various types of audio data related to music, sounds, sound effects, and the like, an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 143, and an amplifier 1431. The sound DSP 143 reads the sound data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the sound ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the sound data after the data processing to the speaker 24 (via the amplifier 1431). The amplifier 1431 adjusts the sound volume according to an instruction regarding the sound volume obtained from the central CPU 141 via the audio DSP 143, and outputs the sound data to the speaker 24. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, a production sound with a three-dimensional sound effect and a production without the three-dimensional sound effect such that the production sound can be heard from a position of a sound source virtually formed other than the position where the speaker 24 is installed. The sound data corresponding to the sound is output.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the VDP performs the drawing management and the audio DSP performs the sound management. However, a configuration in which the VDP performs both the drawing management and the sound management may be employed. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an audio DSP.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
As illustrated in FIG. 8, the lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 is based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152, and based on the program, the light emitting element included in the stage character 7, the board lamp 25 (the board lamps 25A and 25B, the starting port lamp 38, the special winning port lamp (not shown), and the V winning). Lamps (not shown)), frame lamps 37 (left side lamps 37A, right side lamps 37B, center lamps 37C, button lamps 262), a stage effect motor 71 for operating the stage effects 7, and a stage button 26 are operated. Calculation processing for controlling the effect button motor 261 and the like is performed. Further, when the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command for notifying the operation to the effect control board 130. The effect control board 130 transmits a command (hereinafter, referred to as an “operation effect start command”) for executing an effect to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 in response to receiving the operation command. . By receiving the operation effect start command, the image sound control board 140 can execute an effect using images and sounds on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. Further, the lamp control board 150 can execute an effect of causing various lamps to emit light by receiving the operation effect start command.

  In the lamp ROM 152, for example, a light emission pattern for controlling the light emission of each effect means and an operation pattern for controlling the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect combination 7 are stored in advance. The light emission pattern data includes, for example, information indicating the type of light to be emitted, the light emission color, the light emission time, and the like. The lamp RAM 153 is used, for example, as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing.

  The lamp CPU 151 renders data (hereinafter, also referred to as “data related to image and sound control”) for designating a light emission pattern (and an operation pattern) of an effect related to the start at each effect start timing. From the image / acoustic control board 140 via the PC. For example, the lamp CPU 151 reads a light emission pattern (and an operation pattern) specified by the received data from the lamp ROM 152, temporarily stores (sets) the same in the lamp RAM 153, and performs control based on the pattern. Thus, for example, control is performed such that each of the effect units emits light or operates in synchronization with (or asynchronously with) the effect of displaying an image performed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  For example, the lamp CPU 151 controls the light emission control based on the light emission pattern specified from the start of the variable effect in response to receiving the data specifying the light emission pattern at the start of the variable effect at the start timing of the variable effect. Execute Further, for example, in response to receiving data specifying a light emission pattern for the reach effect at the start timing of a reach effect (for example, normal reach) described later, light emission control based on the light emission pattern designated from the start of the reach effect Execute Also, for example, in response to receiving data specifying a light emission pattern for the notice effect at the start timing of a notice effect (for example, premier cut-in) to be described later, based on the light emission pattern designated from the start of the notice effect. Execute light emission control.

  It should be noted that the light emission pattern (and operation pattern) for each effect is not limited to the configuration in which different areas prepared in advance for each effect in the lamp RAM 153 are stored. For example, one area in the lamp RAM 153 may have one or more effects. May be used as an area for storing a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

  Further, the data relating to the image and sound control may be data for collectively specifying a light emission pattern (and an operation pattern) relating to one or more effects. As an example, at a timing when a predetermined effect (for example, SPSP reach described later) is started during the variable effect, the lamp CPU 151 performs a plurality of effects executed during a specific period (for example, during SPSP reach) after the predetermined effect. In response to receiving data for collectively specifying the light emission pattern corresponding to the light emission pattern, the light emission control based on the light emission pattern specified by the data may be performed during the specific period. Further, as another example, in response to receiving data instructing the start of the variable effect, the lamp CPU 151 sets the light emission patterns corresponding to all the effects performed during the current variable effect in the lamp RAM 153. The light emission control based on the light emission pattern may be performed during the fluctuation effect.

  The configuration of the gaming machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11 is merely an example, and may be another configuration. Further, the ratio described with reference to FIG. 9 is merely an example, and any ratio may be used.

[About decorative design 501 and small design 502]
Next, an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 will be described. Here, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of hit notification and an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of loss notification.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, a decorative pattern 501 and a small pattern 502 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The decorative pattern 501 is displayed, for example, at the center of the screen. The decorative pattern 501 includes a left decorative pattern 501A as a decorative pattern in the left column, a middle decorative pattern 501B as a decorative pattern in the middle row, and a right decorative pattern 501C as a decorative pattern in the right column. In the present embodiment, the “decorative symbols” include, for example, 1 symbol to 9 symbols indicating numbers 1 to 9.

  The decorative symbol 501 is started to fluctuate with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol. The combination of numbers indicated by the three decorative symbols left, middle, and right that are stopped and displayed indicates whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. For example, if the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, “hit notification” is performed, and if it is a loss, “loss notification” is performed.

  In the “hit notification”, for example, the left decoration is set so as to be a combination for notifying the big hit (a combination of so-called zigzag: 444 (see FIGS. 12A, 19J, and 21F)). The decorative symbol 501 is "temporarily stopped" in the order of the symbol 501A, the right decorative symbol 501C, and the middle decorative symbol 501B. “Temporary stop display” is to slightly move the decorative symbol so as to swing in the vertical direction or to repeat slight enlargement and reduction without substantially changing the display position of the decorative symbol. In the hit notification, after the three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols 501 are stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 12B and 21G). At this time, with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 (that is, the left small symbol which is the small symbol in the left column, and the small and medium symbol which is the small symbol in the middle row) is combined with the same combination of numerals as the decorative symbol 501. , And the right symbol (small symbol in the right column) are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 12A). Then, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the combination of the three small symbols 502 is stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501 (see FIG. 12B). Here, the small symbol 502 is a symbol that starts to fluctuate with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and is stopped and displayed with the stop display of the special symbol. The “small symbols” include 1 symbol to 9 symbols indicating numbers of 1 to 9 like the decorative symbols. The small symbol 502 is, for example, a symbol displayed at the lower left of the screen, and is an image smaller than the decorative symbol 501.

  In “losing notification”, a combination for notifying a loss (a so-called loose eye (see FIG. 28 (A)) or a reach loss (see FIGS. 12 (C) and (D), and FIGS. 23 (H) and (I)) For example, the decoration pattern 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left decoration pattern 501A, the right decoration pattern 501C, the middle decoration pattern 501B, and then the combination of the three decoration patterns 501 basically changes. And stop display in the same manner. At this time, along with the stop display of the three decorative symbols 501, the small symbols 502 (the left small symbol, the middle and small symbols, and the right small symbol) that have been variably displayed are stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbols 501 ( FIG. 12 (D)). Note that when the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination for notifying a loss, the small symbol 502 is rapidly moved from top to bottom in each of the three columns (that is, the left column, the middle column, and the right column). The display is changed as if scrolling with. FIG. 12C illustrates a state in which the small symbol 502 is displayed at a high speed while the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped at the combination of “434” which is the reach loss. In addition, along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501 in the combination for notifying the loss, the small symbol 502 may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501.

  As is clear from the above, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed by the same combination of numbers when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are common in that the variable display is started with the start of the variable symbol display and the stop display is performed with the special symbol stop display. When the special symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed with the same combination of numbers.

  However, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are different in the following points. First, the decorative symbol 501 is usually displayed relatively large in the center of the screen, while the small symbol 502 is displayed relatively small at the lower left of the screen. In the decorative symbol 501, a part of the three-column decorative symbol 501 may be temporarily stopped and displayed while the special symbol is being changed, whereas the small symbol 502 is a three-column small symbol 502. Are not temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, in the decorative design 501, the left decorative design 501A and the right decorative design 501C may be temporarily stopped at the same design, and the middle decorative design 501B may be displayed in a variable manner (so-called reach effect). On the other hand, in the small symbol 502, the small and medium symbols do not fluctuate while the left and right small symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol. Even at this time, the small symbols 502 in the three rows are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. An example of the reach effect will be described later.

  In addition, while the decorative symbol 501 may be partially or entirely hidden during the display of the special symbol, the small symbol 502 may be partially or entirely hidden. Absent. For example, the middle decorative pattern 501B of the three rows of decorative symbols 501 may be hidden, whereas the small row 502 of the three rows is not partially hidden, and the middle decorative symbols 501 are not displayed. While the 501B is not displayed, the small and medium design is still displayed (variable display). An effect example in which the middle decorative symbol 501B of the three decorative symbols 501 is not displayed will be described later.

  In addition, the display pattern (for example, shape and size) of the decorative symbol 501 may change according to the situation of the variable effect, whereas the display pattern of the small symbol 502 changes according to the condition of the variable effect. It does not change. For example, at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol 501, the decorative symbol 501 is composed of a combination of numbers and characters (not shown), and during a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), the character disappears and is composed only of numbers. . The numbers may change from European characters to Chinese characters, or vice versa. On the other hand, the small symbol 502 is composed only of numbers, and is not composed in combination with a character like the decorative symbol 501. The small symbol 502 does not change from a combination of a character and a numeral to only a numeral, unlike the decorative symbol 501.

  In addition to the one to nine symbols, the decorative symbol 501 includes a symbol (special symbol) that informs that a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 18C)) will be executed. ing. On the other hand, the small symbol 502 is composed of 1 symbol to 9 symbols, and does not include a special symbol. The small symbol 502 may include the same special symbol as the decorative symbol 501, or may include a special symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol 501.

  In addition, the display position of the decorative symbol 501 may change according to the situation of the variable effect, whereas the display position of the small symbol 502 does not change according to the condition of the variable effect. Specifically, the decorative pattern 501 is basically displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and may be displayed at a corner of the screen during a reach effect, for example. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 501A of the three decorative symbols 501 moves to the upper left of the screen and is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 501C of the three decorative symbols 501 moves to the upper right of the screen and displayed. Is done. On the other hand, the display position of the small symbol 502 is fixed to the lower left of the screen.

  Further, the transparency of the decorative design 501 may change according to the situation of the variable effect, whereas the transparency of the small design 502 does not change according to the condition of the variable effect. In other words, the visibility of the effect image behind the decorative symbol 501 may change due to the change in the transparency of the decorative symbol 501. On the other hand, the effect image behind the small symbol 502 is not always visible due to the small symbol 502.

  As described above, the presence / absence of the display and the display position do not change according to the state of the variable effect, and the transparency does not change according to the state of the variable effect. For this reason, even if the visibility of the decorative symbol 501 is reduced due to the change of the decorative symbol 501, the player views the small symbol 502 to view the progress of the game (for example, that the player is in a fluctuating effect, or That the fluctuation effect has been completed) can be easily grasped.

  As the right decorative symbol 501C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern as the left decorative symbol 501A during the temporary stop display, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are combined by the same combination of numbers as those two decorative symbols 501. A temporary stop may be displayed. In the following description, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C temporarily stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol are collectively referred to as "reach symbol". A straight line connecting the temporarily decorated left decorative symbol 501A and right decorative symbol 501C is referred to as an effective line. With the configuration in which the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed as described above, the player can easily grasp the reach symbol by looking at the small symbols 502 even when the decorative symbol 501 is hidden. Becomes possible. Further, in such a case, a special symbol (during normal fluctuation display) is displayed on a straight line (ie, an effective line of the small symbol 502) connecting the left small symbol and the right small symbol, which are temporarily stopped, as a small symbol. (Unused symbols) may be temporarily stopped and displayed. The special symbol may be, for example, a special symbol that informs the special symbol indicator 41 that the big hit symbol is always stopped and displayed (hereinafter, may be described as “big hit determination”). Further, with the temporary stop display of the special symbol, light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like may be performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear to emit light in a color different from the rainbow color. Thereby, it is possible to inform the fact that the jackpot has been confirmed inconspicuously.

  It is not always necessary to display the small symbol 502 during the fluctuation effect. For example, basically, the small symbol 502 may not be displayed, and the small symbol 502 may be displayed while the decorative symbol 501 is not displayed or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, the special symbol 502 may include a special symbol.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the “even symbol arrangement” in which the same three even symbols are aligned means that the probability of being a time saving is relatively high, and the probability of being a probability variation is relatively low. "Odd symbol arrangement" in which three odd symbols are aligned means a probability change hit (see FIG. 9B). For this reason, when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) with the even symbols are stopped and displayed, the player is relatively informed that the possibility of shifting to the time saving mode via the jackpot game relating to 6R time saving is relatively high. Can be recognized. In addition, when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) with the odd symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the mode is shifted to the probability variation mode via the jackpot game related to the 6R probability variation. . Even in the case of a decorative pattern 501 with even-numbered patterns, the combination of the decorative pattern 501 (and the small pattern 502) and the fourth pattern (see FIG. 12 (A)) is a jackpot related to 6R time saving or a jackpot related to 6R certain change. Whether there is a unique notification. Here, the fourth symbol is represented by a color, and is displayed in a synchronized manner with the decorative symbol 501 (and the special symbol), and then stopped and displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol 501 (and the special symbol). . In the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, even-numbered symbols are displayed, and when the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in "red", it is a jackpot according to the 6R probability change, and even-numbered symbols are aligned and the fourth symbol Is stopped and displayed in "blue", it is notified that it is a big hit related to 6R time reduction (see FIG. 12B). It should be noted that the fourth symbol is displayed on the front side of the other image and is displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized even when the direct-acting object 7 is operated. However, the fourth symbol is an image (for example, a square image with a side of 5 mm) displayed small toward the edge of the liquid crystal screen 5. For this reason, the fourth symbol is displayed in an inconspicuous manner as compared with the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502), and is hard to be noticed by the player. The fourth symbol may be realized by a light emitting element (for example, a full color LED) provided near the right side of the liquid crystal display device 5. That is, this light-emitting element is lit in the above-mentioned color at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, and is used as the fourth symbol, so that it is uniquely notified whether it is a jackpot related to 6R time saving or a jackpot related to 6R certain change. May be.

  In the variation display of the fourth symbol, for example, the fourth symbols “red”, “blue”, and “yellow” are arranged at the same position in the order of red → blue → yellow → red →. (2 seconds). In the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display state of the fourth symbol of a predetermined color (for example, blue) is switched between display and non-display at regular intervals (for example, every 0.2 seconds) (that is, blinking). May be realized by: It should be noted that when the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) of the combination for reporting the loss and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in “yellow”, the loss is reported (see FIG. 12D).

  The fourth symbol of the present embodiment includes a fourth symbol for the first special symbol synchronized with (ie, corresponding to) the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second symbol for the second special symbol synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol. There are 4 designs. For example, during the variable display of any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol may be controlled in the following manner. Specifically, the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol may be hidden (see FIGS. 12 (A) and (C)), or that the other special symbol is not variably displayed. It may remain stopped and displayed in the color to be notified (for example, green). For example, the color notifying that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner may be the color when the fourth symbol corresponding to the other special symbol is stopped and displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol 501 of the combination for notifying the loss. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the “hold icon 54”, the “icon 53”, the “hold stage 540”, and the “number indicating the number of held special symbol determinations” are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The “hold icon 54” indicates the hold of the special symbol determination, and is an image indicating the reliability of the hold for the jackpot. The “icon 53” is an image indicating that a jackpot may be notified in the variable display during execution, and is an image that is deleted at the stop display timing of the special symbol (see FIG. 12D). The “holding stage 540” is an image for indicating a space in which four holding icons can be displayed, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the maximum number of holdings in the special symbol determination is four. The reserved icons 54 are displayed from left to right in the order in which the reserved symbols are retained (up to four in this embodiment) by the number of reserved special symbol determinations above the reserved stage. This makes it possible to specify the order of suspension based on the display position of the suspension icon 54. For example, when a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol that was displayed in a variable state was stopped and displayed, the first special symbol held first is determined, and the hold symbol displayed leftmost is determined. The icon 54 is shifted to the left and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, 1.1 times) and displayed as the icon 53. Here, the icon 53 is not displayed above the suspension stage. Therefore, the reserved icon 54 and the icon 53 can be easily identified.

  The "number indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations" includes a blue number indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations, and is displayed in the vicinity of this number (in this embodiment, immediately below). There are red numbers indicating the number of holds. The numbers described above are the same as the contents of the holding icon 54 in that the number of holdings in the special symbol determination can be specified. However, the difference is that the hold icon 54 indicates the reliability of the hold, whereas the above-mentioned number does not indicate the reliability at all. The difference is that the above-mentioned numbers are not hidden during the floating effect of the special symbol, whereas the hold icon 54 is sometimes hidden during the floating effect of the special symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned number is an image (for example, a square image with a side of 5 mm) that is smaller than the hold icon 54 and is displayed smaller toward the edge of the liquid crystal screen 5. For this reason, compared to the hold icon 54, the numbers are displayed in an inconspicuous manner, and are hard to be noticed by the player.

[Flow of production in normal game state]
FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of the effect in the normal gaming state. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the flow of performing the variable effect during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state is determined by the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is started, it is determined by the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130. More specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the sub CPU 131 sets the variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern used in the variable display to the variable effect pattern random number (the random number of the effect control random number). One) is determined by lottery using (1).

  For example, the sub-ROM 132 stores one or more types of variation effect patterns in association with the variation pattern of the first special symbol in advance. In the present embodiment, whether or not the reach effect is executed is uniquely determined by determining the variable effect pattern when the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, for example, by determining the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed, the type of the reach effect to be executed is uniquely determined. When a plurality of reach effects are executed, the execution order (FIG. 13 and FIG. The flow shown in FIG. 9D is also uniquely determined.

  In the normal gaming state, the second starting port 12 is less likely to be opened than in the certainty changing gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and the first starting port 11 has more game balls than the second starting port 12. It is easier to win. Here, the game ball hit right by the player basically wins only the second starting port 12 among the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player plays the game by left-handed aiming at the first starting port 11.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 11, a first special symbol determination is executed. Then, after the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. In the normal gaming state, the following fluctuating effects are performed from the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol to the stop display thereof.

  Note that specific examples of various effects described with reference to FIG. 13 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14, 16, and 18 to 23.

  Along with the change display of the special symbol, the decoration symbol 501 is variably displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the small symbol 502 is variably displayed at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 (for example, see FIG. 18A).

  When the variable display of the decorative symbol 501 is started, prior to the stop display of all the decorative symbols 501, for example, the left decorative symbol 501A is temporarily stopped and then the right decorative symbol 501C is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the same decorative symbol as the left decorative symbol 501A during the temporary stop display is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 501C, the reach is established (FIGS. 13A to 13B, for example, FIG. B)). On the other hand, when the same decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C, the reach is not established (FIG. 13 (a) → (y)).

  As described above, even when the reach is established and the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are not temporarily stopped and the three small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped. The variable display is not stopped and displayed.

  In the case where the reach is not established, the loss notification based on the irregularities is performed after the variable display of the three decorative symbols 501 is performed (FIG. 13 (z)). At this time, light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like emit light in a color different from the rainbow color. In the present embodiment, when the reach is not established, for example, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are not turned off and are synchronized with the rhythm of the BGM output from the speaker 24 with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B. The light emission control in a visible mode is continued (see FIG. 28A).

  On the other hand, when the reach is established (see FIG. 13B), a “reach effect” is performed in which the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left and right and the middle decoration symbol 501B is displayed in a variable manner. The reach effect is an effect that expects that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol will be stopped on the payline as the middle decorative symbol 501B to be aligned.

  In the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, after the reach effect is performed, a loss notification based on the reach loss is performed. In the present embodiment, when the losing notification is performed by the reach losing eyes, all the production means (specifically, the production role object 7, the board lamp, etc.) controlled to be able to emit light in accordance with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B. 25, the effect button 26, the frame lamp 37, and the starting port lamp 38) are turned off (for example, see FIG. 23H). This light-off state is continued until the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is stopped and displayed. Then, with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502), for example, the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light for a predetermined time (for example, one second). As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like during the loss notification is different depending on whether or not the reach effect is provided.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the following effects during the fluctuation effect (all of which will be described later), among the effect means controlled to be capable of emitting light, the following effect means is controlled to emit light in a rainbow color. It should be noted that, other than the directing means indicating that the light emission is controlled to be iridescent, light may be emitted in a single color (for example, purple) or a plurality of colors (for example, yellow and green) other than iridescent, or may be turned off. . Specifically, during the winning action effect, the effect character 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 emit rainbow light. In addition, during the hit notification by the symbol alignment (for example, from the victory effect to the start of the re-fluctuation effect and during the successful effect), the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow colors. In addition, during the third pseudo continuous production, the presentation attraction 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light. During the full rotation reach, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed in a mode of notifying that it has been determined to be a big hit by the special symbol judgment (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "mode of notifying the big hit"), the board lamp 25A and the 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow colors. Further, when the button effect is executed in a manner of notifying the jackpot, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 emit rainbow light during this effect. When the icon change effect of changing the hold icon 54 or the icon 53 is executed in a mode of notifying a jackpot or notifying that there is a hold determined to be a jackpot, the board lamp 25A is displayed during this effect. , 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the start port lamp 38 emit rainbow light. In addition, while the hold icon 54 or the icon 53 changed by the icon change effect in the above-described mode is displayed, the start-up lamp 38 emits a rainbow light.

  Each of the effects is an effect that notifies that a big hit has occurred and that the player has an advantage. During such an effect, the effect means is controlled to emit rainbow light as described above. On the other hand, during an effect other than the above-described effect during the fluctuation effect (including the above-described effects other than the above-described embodiments), the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emit light other than the rainbow color. With this, it is possible to suggest that the effect is advantageous to the player by performing the rainbow-colored emission control of the effect means. In the following description, the above-mentioned effects (specifically, a hit action effect, during a hit notification by symbol alignment, a third pseudo continuous effect, a full rotation reach, a cut-in effect, a button effect, an icon change, Light emission corresponding to an effect other than the effect) is collectively referred to as “fluctuation effect corresponding light emission”. The variation effect corresponding light emission is light emission in a light emission color other than the rainbow color. For example, the light emission during the loss notification is light emission corresponding to a fluctuation effect.

  Hereinafter, the details of the reach effect will be described. In the present embodiment, “normal reach”, “SP reach”, “SPSP reach”, and “full rotation reach” are prepared in advance as reach effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 13 ( c) to (e), (q) and (w)).

As illustrated in FIG. 13 and FIG. 9 (D), in this embodiment, the normal reach is directly developed from the established reach (FIGS. 13 (a) → (b) → (c)).
(Corresponding variation pattern for jackpot: A1, A3, A6, A7, A10 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H0, H1, H3, H6, H7, H10, H11)

SP reach may be developed, for example, by the following flow.
・ Flow from normal reach to SP reach (Fig. 13 (c) → (d))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern for jackpot: A3, A10 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H3, H10, H11)
・ The flow of direct development from reach establishment to SP reach (Fig. 13 (a) → (b) → (d))
(Corresponding variation pattern for jackpot: A2, A8, A9)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H2, H8, H9)

The SPSP reach may evolve, for example, in the following flow. In the present embodiment, two types of SPSP reach, “SPSP reach 1” and “SPSP reach 2,” are prepared in advance (FIGS. 13E and 13Q).
-Flow from normal reach to SPSP reach (Fig. 13 (c) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding variation pattern for jackpot: A6, A7)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H6, H7)
-Flow from SP reach to SPSP reach (Fig. 13 (d) → (s) → (v) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding variation pattern for jackpot: A8 to A13)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H8 to H11)
-Flow of direct development from reach establishment to SPSP reach (Fig. 13 (a) → (b) → (e) or (q))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern for jackpot: A4, A5)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: H4, H5)

For example, the full-rotation reach is directly developed from reach establishment (FIG. 13 (a) → (b) → (w)).
(Corresponding variation pattern for jackpot: A14)
(Corresponding variation pattern for loss: none)

  “Normal reach” (see FIG. 13C) is, for example, a middle decoration pattern that has been scrolled at a high speed in a state where the reach design (left decoration design 501A and right decoration design 501C) is largely displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This is an effect of reducing the scroll speed of 501B (for example, see FIG. 18 (I)). In the case of a big hit, after the middle decoration symbol 501B is scrolled slowly (that is, at the end of the normal reach), the middle decoration symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the hit notification based on the symbol alignment is performed. Note that, with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, when the hit notification based on the symbol alignment is performed following the normal reach, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light with the temporary stop display of the middle decoration symbol 501B. . The light emission control in the rainbow color is continued until a re-fluctuation effect described later starts.

  On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in the end of the normal reach, the middle decorative pattern 501B different from the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the loss is notified by the reach loss (FIG. 13 (r)). In this case, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 that have reached the reach loss is stopped and displayed in the same manner without change. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach of the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop displays, the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light.

  In addition, when the middle decorative pattern 501B is scrolled slowly at normal reach and then scrolled at high speed without temporary stop display, the reach reaches SP reach or SPSP reach (FIGS. 13 (c) → (d), (e)). Or (q)). Note that when developing to SP reach or SPSP reach, scrolling may be resumed (hereinafter, referred to as “restart”) after temporarily displaying the middle decorative symbol 501B having a different number from the reach symbol.

  The normal reach is, for example, a reach effect that is sometimes executed in response to the jackpot variation pattern, but is easily executed in response to the loss variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short. Therefore, it can be said that the normal reach is a reach effect with a relatively low reliability (for example, a reliability of 3%).

  In the present embodiment, when light emission corresponding to normal reach (one of the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission) is performed, various lamps (for example, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37) emit light in a light emission color other than the rainbow color.

  “SP reach” (see FIG. 13D) is, for example, an effect in which one character, which is an animation character, searches for a specific one character (for example, character E) (FIG. 13S). , For example, see FIG. 19B). In the present embodiment, five target characters to be searched are prepared (for example, characters A to E) and are set in advance so that the reliability of SP reach is different for each target character. For example, it is possible to make the player know the reliability of SP reach depending on the type of the target character, and the reliability is higher in the order of character A to character E.

  In the SP reach, in the case of a big hit, for example, a “hit action effect” is executed in response to the own character finding the target character at the end of the SP reach (FIG. 13 (t)). The “hit operation effect” is an effect that notifies the fact that the jackpot has been confirmed by operating the staging part 7, and is an effect that is executed only when there is a big hit. For example, with the start of the hit action effect, the effect combination 7 moves from the initial position to the advanced position. In addition, along with the operation of the stage combination 7, a rainbow effect image coloring the periphery of the stage combination 7 is displayed on the entire screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. In addition, the staging part 7 emits a rainbow light from the start of the hit action staging (that is, when the staging part 7 is arranged at the initial position). The light emission control of the illusion color of the staging part 7 is continued until the end of the hit action effect. At the end of the hit operation effect, the stage effect 7 returns from the advanced position to the initial position. At this time, the stage production 7 continues to emit rainbow light. In addition, the start timing at which the stage production 7 emits a rainbow color may be the timing at which the stage production 7 is arranged at the advance position, or the timing at which the stage 7 passes a predetermined position between the initial position and the advance position. . In this case, during the period from the start of the hit action production to the start of the emission control of the production combination 7 in the rainbow color, the production combination 7 may be controlled to be turned off, or the non-rainbow color may be controlled. Light may be emitted in a color (for example, white).

  The icon 53, the suspension icon 54, and the suspension stage 540 are hidden with the start of the hit operation effect. These images are displayed again immediately before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, two seconds before).

  In the present embodiment, during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol, the effect in which the staging part 7 operates while emitting light in a color other than the rainbow color may be executed a plurality of times (for example, the first and second pseudo-sequences). When the effect is executed, the effect 7 operates: see FIG. 18 (G)). However, the effect in which the stage combination 7 emits light while emitting a rainbow color can be executed only once during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the jackpot. In addition, the production in which the production character 7 operates while emitting a rainbow color may be executed only twice or once or more during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol indicating the big hit. .

  In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light from the start of the hit operation effect to the end of the hit operation effect in order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. (See FIG. 19 (I)). In addition, for example, from the start of the hit action effect to the end of the hit action effect, the button lamp 262 is displayed so that the effect button 26 remains in the normal state (or is controlled to the protruding state) and emits a rainbow light. Emits a rainbow color. The present embodiment employs a configuration in which the button lamp 262 emits a rainbow light to achieve a powerful effect, although the effective period is not during the hit operation effect.

  Also, during the hit action effect, a hit action effect sound is output from the speaker 24 to notify that the big hit has been determined from the start of the hit action effect to the end of the hit action effect. Note that, with the start of the winning action effect, the reach symbol (ie, the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C) during the temporary stop display and the middle decorative symbol 501B during the variable display are hidden. Also, during the winning action effect, the small symbol 502 is not displayed temporarily but displayed in a variable manner. In addition, along with the start of the winning action effect, the combination of the three small symbols 502 may be temporarily stopped and displayed so as to be a combination for notifying the big hit with the same number as the reach symbol.

  With the end of the hit action effect shown in FIG. 13 (t), the display of the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C in the temporarily stopped display, which have been hidden, is restarted. Along with this, the middle decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification based on symbol alignment is performed (see FIG. 13 (u), for example, FIG. 19 (J)). Note that, with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, when a hit notification based on symbol alignment is performed following SP reach, three decorative symbols 501 of the same size are temporarily stopped and displayed on an effective line at the center of the screen with the end of the hit operation effect. . At this time, since the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C have been hidden until the end of the hit operation effect, it looks as if three decorative symbols 501 were temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time. In addition, when light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in the rainbow color is started in accordance with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B, these lamps are followed by a hit operation effect and the rainbow color. It continues to emit light. The light emission control in the rainbow color is continued until a re-fluctuation effect described later starts.

  If the SP reach does not result in a jackpot, the loss is notified by the reach loss eye following the SP reach (see FIGS. 13 (v), 19 (D), and (E)). At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the middle decoration symbol 501B, the light-off control of all the effect means controlled to be able to emit light is performed. In addition, an effect display indicating that the own character could not find the target character is executed. When a loss occurs in the SP reach, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 that have reached the reach loss is stopped and displayed as it is without change. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach of the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop displays, the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light.

  On the other hand, when SP reach is developed from SP reach, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is not stopped and displayed by this loss notification, and the middle decorative symbol 501B constituting the reach loss eye is restarted (FIG. 13 ( v) → (s) → (v) → (e) or (q)). At this time, the control for turning off the effect means related to the loss notification, which is started with the temporary stop display of the middle decoration symbol 501B, ends with the restart of the middle decoration symbol 501B. Accordingly, the emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear to emit light in a color different from the rainbow color. The SPSP reach may be developed in the middle of the SP reach without the loss notification.

  The SP reach is, for example, a reach effect that is sometimes executed in response to the jackpot variation pattern, but is easily executed in response to the loss variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is slightly longer. For this reason, it can be said that the SP reach is a reach effect with a medium reliability (for example, a reliability of 15%).

  The SP reach of the present embodiment is configured by an effect in which the own character searches for the target character and a hit operation effect (FIGS. 13 (s) and (t)). In the present embodiment, when light emission corresponding to SP reach (one of the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission) is performed except for the hit operation effect, various lamps (for example, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37) emit light other than iridescent. Emitted in color. Note that the hit action effect need not be an effect that constitutes SP reach.

  Note that a reach effect having an effect content different from the effect content described above may be prepared in advance as the SP reach. For example, the SP reach may be an effect in which the character performs an action to destroy a decorative pattern different from the reach symbol so that the decorative symbol different from the reach symbol does not stop as the middle decorative symbol 501B. In such SP reach, for example, if the user's own character succeeds in destroying a decorative pattern different from the reach pattern, a hit notification based on the pattern alignment is performed. Notification is performed.

  “SPSP reach” is an effect performed over a longer period of time than the normal reach and the SP reach, and is a reach effect with higher reliability than the normal reach and the SP reach. The SPSP reach is hard to be executed when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, and is easily executed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. Therefore, the reliability of SPSP reach is relatively high, for example, 40%. The SPSP reach is, for example, a reach effect that is easily executed corresponding to a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long.

  “SPSP Reach 1” (see FIG. 13E), which is one of the SPSP Reach, is an effect in which, for example, an animation or CG's own character fights with an enemy (see, for example, FIGS. 20 to 23). In the present embodiment, the reliability of the SPSP reach 1 is set in advance so that the reliability of the SPSP reach 1 differs for each enemy that the character fights. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of enemy A to enemy F. For this reason, it is possible to make the player know the reliability of SPSP Reach 1 depending on the type of the enemy.

  In the SPSP Reach 1, for example, a battle between one character having a weapon (iron ball in the present embodiment) and one of the six enemies A to F is started (for example). FIG. 13F, for example, see FIG. Thereafter, during a battle between the player's own character and the enemy, which is a timing in the middle of SPSP Reach 1, one of the characters A to C as a friend of the player's own character participates in the battle (FIG. 20 (E )reference). In the present embodiment, the reliability of the SPSP reach 1 is set in advance so as to be different for each character participating in the battle. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of the character A to the character C. For this reason, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of SPSP Reach 1 based on the type of the character participating in the battle.

  Here, the end-stage effects of SPSP Reach 1 (FIGS. 13 (l) to 13 (p)) will be described. The flow of a specific effect from the start of SPSP Reach 1 to the middle stage will be described later with reference to FIGS. In the case of a big hit, a hit action effect similar to the hit action effect shown in FIG. 13 (t) is executed at the end of SPSP Reach 1 (FIGS. 13 (f) to (k) → (l)). The SPSP reach 1 and the SP reach have the same effect of the hit action effect, and a description thereof will be omitted. Note that the effect mode of the hit action effect may be different between SPSP reach 1 and SP reach, and for example, the execution time of the hit action effect may be longer in SPSP reach 1 than in SP reach.

  Following the hit action effect according to FIG. 13 (l), this is an effect to notify that the big hit is confirmed, and a “victory effect” in which the character defeats the enemy and wins is performed (FIG. 13 (m), FIG. 21 (C)). Along with this, the middle decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification based on symbol alignment is performed (FIG. 13 (l) → (m), for example, see FIG. 21 (C)). The reach symbol 501B is displayed small in the upper corner of the screen, while the middle decoration symbol 501B is displayed large in the center of the screen (see FIG. 21C). Along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B are temporarily stopped by the middle decoration pattern 501B so that the frame lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C continue to emit light in a rainbow color following the hit operation effect. And 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color. The light emission control in the rainbow color is continued until a re-fluctuation effect described later starts. It should be noted that the rainbow control of the illuminating effect of the staging part 7 and the button lamp 262, which is started at the start of the winning action effect, ends with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B.

  In addition, after the middle decoration symbol 501B is temporarily stopped and displayed and before the re-fluctuation effect starts, the victory effect ends when the character and the enemy are erased. Along with this, three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line in the center of the screen (see FIG. 13 (n), for example, FIG. 21 (D)). At the same time, the character "Victory" indicating the victory of the character is displayed. In addition, three small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the small symbol 502 from the time when the temporary stop display is started in conjunction with the temporary stop display of the middle decoration symbol 501B.

  On the other hand, if the player loses his / her enemy at the end of the SPSP Reach 1, "Loss suggestion" is performed, and then the loss is reported by the reach loss (FIGS. 13 (f) to (k) → (o)). → (p), for example, see FIGS. 23 (G) and (H)). Loss suggestion may be executed not only in the case of a loss but also in the case of a jackpot. It should be noted that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit blue light in response to the suggestion of a loss. Subsequent to the light emission control in blue, with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B, the light-off control of all the effect means controlled to enable light emission is performed. In the case of a loss, the combination of the three decorative symbols 501 that have reached the reach loss is stopped and displayed as it is without change. Along with this, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed at the reach of the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. Along with these stop displays, the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light.

  Note that, when a losing suggestion is made in the case of a big hit, the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is not stopped and displayed in the losing notification following the losing suggestion, and is similar to the hitting action effect shown in FIG. A winning action effect is executed (FIG. 13 (o) → (p) → (l)). At this time, the control for turning off the effect means related to the loss notification started with the temporary stop display of the middle decoration symbol 501B ends with the start of the hit operation effect. Along with this, the stage combination 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 emit rainbow light. In addition, when the hit motion effect is started via the suggestion of a loss (and the notification of the loss), the reach loss eye during the temporary stop display is hidden with the start of the hit motion effect. This is different from the start of the hit action effect (FIG. 13 (l)) executed without starting. Note that the small symbol 502 is displayed in a variable manner without a temporary stop display as in the case of the hit operation effect performed without the suggestion of a loss.

  A victory effect is executed with the end of the hit operation effect via the suggestion of a loss (FIG. 13 (o) → (p) → (l) → (m)). Along with this, the display of the reach symbol during the temporary stop display, which has been hidden, is restarted, and the middle decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, a hit notification based on the symbol arrangement is performed (FIG. 13 (n)). Note that, with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. In this way, the flow of the effect of performing the hit notification through the suggestion of the loss and making it appear as if the jackpot has been revived is referred to as “resurrection hit”. On the other hand, the flow of the effect of performing the hit hit notification without the suggestion of the losing is called “direct hit”. Since the flow after the victory effect is the same between the resurrection hit and the direct hit, the description is omitted here. Note that, with the end of the hit action effect via the suggestion of a loss, the three decorative symbols 501 may be changed to odd-numbered symbols, and a hit notification based on the odd-numbered symbols may be performed.

  In this embodiment, during the SPSP reach 1, except for the hit operation effect and the victory effect, when the light emission corresponding to the SPSP reach 1 (one of the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission) is performed, various lamps (for example, a board lamp) 25 and the frame lamp 37) emit light in an emission color other than the rainbow color.

  Note that as the predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the start of the victory effect, the middle decorative symbol 501B having the same number as the reach symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, along with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the same combination of numbers as the decorative symbol 501. As a result, following the emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the victory effect, a hit notification based on the matching of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 is performed.

  “SPSP Reach 2” (see FIG. 13 (q)), which is one of the SPSP reach, is a theme of, for example, a friendship between a character of animation or CG and one of the characters A to E. (Not shown). In the present embodiment, the reliability of the SPSP reach 2 is set in advance so that the reliability of the SPSP reach 2 differs for each character with which the own character confirms friendship. For example, the reliability is higher in the order of the character A to the character E. For this reason, it is possible to make the player grasp the reliability of the SPSP reach 2 based on the type of the character that is the partner of the own character. The SPSP reach 2 is, for example, a reach effect that has a lower reliability than the SPSP reach 1 but has a higher reliability than the normal reach and the SP reach.

  In the case of a big hit, at the end of SPSP Reach 2, the own character succeeds in communicating with the opponent's character and the hit is notified by matching the symbols (see FIG. 13 (r)). On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the mind of the own character and the opponent character pass each other at the end of the SPSP Reach 2, and the loss is finally notified based on the reach loss. The light emission control at the time of the hit notification and the loss notification in the SPSP reach 2 is the same as that of the SPSP reach 1, and the description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the "re-fluctuation effect" is executed subsequent to the hit notification (FIGS. 13 (n), (r), and (u)) when the normal reach, the SP reach, or the SPSP reach is executed. . Further, following the re-fluctuation effect, a “successful effect” or a “failure effect” (not shown) as a result of the re-fluctuation effect is executed (for example, see FIGS. 21D to 21F).

  The “re-fluctuation effect” is a decorative pattern 501 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode after the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination for reporting a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as a “big hit mode”). Is restarted, and it is expected that the decorative symbols 501 are expected to be changed to odd-numbered symbols. In the present embodiment, along with the start of the re-fluctuation effect, the three decorative symbols 501 are restarted in a manner that allows the user to recognize that the symbol-aligned state is being held while being synchronized in the symbol-aligned state (for example, , 444, 555, and 666 (see FIG. 21E). In the present embodiment, the small symbol 502 is not restarted during the fluctuation effect, and the temporary stop display is continued with the combination of the numbers temporarily stopped just before the start of the fluctuation effect (see FIG. 21 (E)). ). This point is different from the display mode of the small symbol 502 during the full rotation reach described later.

  In the present embodiment, the emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is performed so that the entire gaming machine appears to emit white light from the start of the re-fluctuation effect to the end thereof.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the even symbol arrangement is restarted and changed to the odd symbol arrangement (hereinafter, such a change is referred to as “promotion”) by the re-change effect. By being promoted by the re-fluctuation effect, it is possible for the player to recognize that the player has won a probability change, and to recognize that the player will shift to the probability change mode (ie, the probability change game state) via the jackpot game. Is possible.

  The “successful effect” is an effect indicating that the decorative symbols 501 with the odd-numbered symbols are displayed in the re-fluctuation effect. In the present embodiment, with the start of the successful effect, the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed in odd-numbered symbols (see FIG. 21F). Then, after that, the combination of the three decorative patterns 501 is stopped and displayed as it is without change (see FIG. 21 (G)). At this time, with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same odd-numbered combinations as the decorative symbol 501. Thereafter, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same odd-numbered combination as the decorative symbol 501.

  In the successful presentation, a “rainbow concentrated line image” (not shown) that emphasizes the decorative pattern 501 is displayed, and a successful presentation sound such as “Pukin” is output from the speaker 24. The “rainbow color concentrated line image” is, for example, an image representing a rainbow-colored concentrated line radially arranged from the center around the middle decorative pattern 501B. The rainbow color concentrated line image is continuously displayed from the start of the successful effect until the stop-displayed decorative symbol 501 is deleted (specifically, until the start of the jackpot game). The successful effect sound is output from the start of the successful effect until the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame are arranged so that the entire gaming machine appears to emit light in a rainbow color from the start of the successful production to a predetermined timing after the end of the successful production (for example, at the start of the first round game). The lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light.

  The “failure effect” is an effect that indicates that the decorative symbols 501 with the even-numbered symbols are displayed in the re-fluctuation effect. In this embodiment, along with the start of the failed effect, the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed with even-numbered symbols (not shown). After that, the combination of the three decorative patterns 501 is stopped and displayed in the same manner without changing. At this time, along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same even-numbered combination as the decorative symbol 501. Thereafter, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same even-numbered combination as the decorative symbol 501. When the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation effect of this time ends, and the big hit game related to the 6R time saving or the big hit game related to the 6R sure change is started.

  In the failed effect, a “white concentrated line image” (not shown) that emphasizes the decorative pattern 501 is displayed, and a failed effect sound such as “Cashan” is output from the speaker 24. The “white concentrated line image” is, for example, an image that represents a white concentrated line radially arranged from the center around the middle decorative pattern 501B. The white concentrated line image continues to be displayed until the stop-displayed decorative symbol 501 is deleted (specifically, until the big hit game starts). The failed effect sound is output from the start of the failed effect until the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the type of the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed is the 6R certain change, the probability of executing the failure effect is set to be relatively low (for example, 1%). For this reason, it can be said that the failure effect in the present embodiment is an effect that indicates that the possibility of being a time-saving hit is relatively very high and the possibility of being a probability-change hit is relatively very low. Also, the failure effect is relatively very likely to shift to the time-saving mode (ie, the time-saving game state) via the jackpot game, and may shift to the probable change mode (ie, the probable-variation game state) via the jackpot game. This is a production that suggests that is relatively very low. In the case of the 6R probability change, the failed effect does not have to be executed, and the successful effect may always be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the board lamp and the frame member 3 are displayed so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit blue light from the start of the failed production to a predetermined timing after the end of the failed production (for example, at the start of the first round game). 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit blue light.

  In addition, when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are temporarily stopped and displayed with the odd symbols aligned in the hit notification, the re-fluctuation effect may be executed. In this case, the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are always stopped and displayed in odd numbers. In this manner, it is determined that when the decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols, they are always stopped and displayed with odd-numbered symbols via a re-fluctuation effect. For this reason, in the case where the odd-numbered symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C may emit rainbow light from the start of the re-fluctuation effect to the end thereof. Thereby, the rainbow-colored light emission control according to the hit notification started with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B is continued during the re-fluctuation effect, and is performed after the successful effect subsequent to the re-fluctuation effect ends. There is no interruption until timing (for example, at the start of the first round game). If it is not necessary to make the presence or absence of the re-fluctuation effect depend on whether the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) temporarily stopped and displayed in the hit notification is an even number or an odd number, the effect time of the variable effect corresponding to the same fluctuation pattern is re-fluted. There is no need to adjust depending on the presence or absence of. Thereby, even if any of the even-numbered symbols and the odd-numbered symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed by the hit notification, it is possible to execute each effect related to the variable effect at the same timing corresponding to the same variable pattern. is there.

  In addition, when the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are temporarily stopped and displayed in odd numbers in the hit notification, the re-fluctuation effect need not be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the re-fluctuation effect in which there is no possibility that the pattern matching pattern is changed at all. For example, the same odd decorative pattern 501B as the reach symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification based on the odd symbol alignment is performed. After that, the combination of the three decorative patterns 501 is stopped and displayed in the same manner without changing. At this time, with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same odd-numbered combinations as the decorative symbol 501. Thereafter, along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 501, the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in the same odd-numbered combination as the decorative symbol 501. It should be noted that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light in accordance with the temporary stop display of the middle decorative pattern 501B. The emission control in the rainbow color may be continued until a predetermined timing after the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, at the time of starting a big hit game), or may be ended before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed. .

  The “full rotation reach” (see FIG. 13 (w)) is a reach effect with a 100% reliability of notifying that the probability hit is determined (that is, the big hit symbol indicating the 6R probability change is always stopped and displayed). . The full rotation reach synchronizes the same left decorative symbol 501A, middle decorative symbol 501B, and right decorative symbol 501C, for example, such that when the combination of "111" is displayed, the next combination of "222" is displayed. This is a reach effect that scrolls slowly while keeping the pattern in the same pattern.

  During the full rotation reach, for example, the decorative pattern 501 is relatively large, and is displayed as a translucent image to the extent that another image (for example, own character) behind the decorative pattern 501 can be seen. The small symbol 502 in the full rotation reach is synchronized with the decorative symbol 501, and the same left small symbol, middle small symbol, and right small symbol are synchronized and slowly scrolled in the same pattern. Note that the small symbol 502 may be continuously displayed at a high speed until the end of the full rotation reach (for example, when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol 501 is started).

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the full-rotation reach, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a seven-pattern-aligned manner indicating seven, and do not change in the same manner, but the first special symbol indicating a 6R certain change. (See FIG. 13 (x)).

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 501 (and the small symbols 502) are always aligned with the seven symbols via the full rotation reach, and there is no temporary stop or stop display other than the seven symbols. For this reason, for example, when temporary stop display is performed with even-numbered patterns, it is not necessary to execute an effect of changing to seven-patterns. There is no need to adjust the production time of the variable production. For this reason, when the full rotation reach is executed, a configuration is adopted that limits the execution of the re-fluctuation effect and the successful effect (or the failed effect). Note that when the full rotation reach is executed, the re-fluctuation effect and the successful effect may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps are set so that the entire gaming machine appears to emit light in a rainbow color from the start of the full rotation reach to a predetermined timing after the end of the full rotation reach (for example, the end of the jackpot game). 37A to 37C emit rainbow light. In addition, for example, a rainbow effect image (for example, a rainbow effect image displayed along the inside of the peripheral portion of the screen, or a rainbow character “full rotation”) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  The full rotation reach is a reach effect that is executed only in the case of a probability change hit, and is a reach effect that is not executed in the case of a time saving hit and a loss. In the present embodiment, the full rotation reach is executed corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern A14 (see FIG. 9D) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long.

  In addition, regardless of the type of the big hit, the full rotation reach may be executed in both the case of the probability change hit and the case of the time saving hit.

  The full-rotation reach in the present embodiment is started when a pseudo-sequence effect described later (see FIG. 18C) is executed three times, but from the normal reach, the SP reach, or the SPSP reach to the full-rotation reach. May evolve.

  In the present embodiment, it is sufficient that the reliability is predetermined so as to increase in the order of normal reach <SP reach <SPSP reach <full rotation reach, and the reliability of these effects may be any value.

  In addition, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the normal game state, and also during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the probability change game state and the time saving game state, the effects described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 13 are performed. Is also good.

[An example of a variable performance in which SPSP Reach 1 is executed]
An example of a specific effect from the start of SPSP Reach 1 to the middle stage will be described with reference to FIGS. An example of a specific effect form of the entire variable effect including SPSP Reach 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the SPSP reach 1 of the present embodiment, the effect content branches based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the SPSP Reach 1 determines, for example, the type of the enemy to be played by the character, whether or not the battle is advantageous for the character, and determines whether the battle is a friend of the character. The type of character participating in the battle, the winner of the battle branches to the effect contents such as whether or not the character is his / her own. The scenario of what effect content branches to is determined in advance at the start of the special symbol change display. Specifically, the rough scenario of SPSP reach 1 is determined by the variable effect pattern determined by the effect control board 130 in correspondence with the variable pattern of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. For example, when a variable effect pattern that can execute the SPSP Reach 1 is determined, the type of the enemy with which the player character competes is uniquely determined.

  The SPSP Reach 1 may be any effect, but the player's expectation of victory (i.e., the expectation of the jackpot) increases as the player's character is more advantageous, and the player's anxiety about defeat as the player's character is less favorable. Feeling (that is, anxiety about losing) is increased.

  In this embodiment, when SPSP Reach 1 is started, the battle between the character and the enemy is started (after FIG. 13 (f)), and the variable effect proceeds in the following flow.

  At the timing at the start of the battle illustrated in FIG. 13F, one of the plurality of enemies A to F is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as the opponent of the character (see FIG. 20A )reference). Immediately below the enemy character, for example, the name of the enemy character and a “reliability display” including one or more golden stars are displayed. The reliability display is a display indicating the degree of victory expectation, which is a high possibility that the own character will win the enemy, and indicates a high degree of reliability. In the reliability display for displaying a gold star illustrated in FIG. 20A, the total number of the gold star and the white star indicates the maximum value of the reliability (5 in the present embodiment). The higher the number of gold stars, the higher the reliability, and the lower the number of gold stars, the lower the reliability. Therefore, the player can recognize the degree of reliability based on the number of golden stars.

  Note that the reliability display is not limited to the above-described one, and may be any display. For example, there may be a reliability display of the probability change determination or a reliability display of the victory determination (that is, the jackpot determination). For example, the display of the reliability indicating five rainbow-colored stars means the determination of a big hit, and when five rainbow-colored stars are displayed, a predetermined timing (for example, a hit operation effect) from the start of the display of the reliability is displayed. Until the start), light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like may be performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear to emit light in a rainbow color.

  Instead of the display indicating the expected degree of victory, a risk level display indicating a risk level indicating a high possibility that the own character may be defeated by the enemy may be displayed.

  Subsequent to the display of the enemy or the like according to FIG. 13 (f), it is suggested that a transition to one of the “own character advantageous route” advantageous to the own character and the “unfavorable character disadvantageous route” to the disadvantage is made. A “pressing effect” is executed (see FIG. 13 (g)). After the pushing effect, the process shifts to the own character advantageous route (see FIG. 13 (i)) or the own character disadvantageous route (see FIG. 13 (h)).

  The “pressing effect” according to FIG. 13 (g) is an effect of executing an effect display in which the own character and the enemy press each other (see FIG. 20 (B)). As a result of the pushing, when the own character pushes over the enemy, the process shifts to the “own character advantageous route”, and when the own character is pushed out by the enemy, the process shifts to the “own character disadvantageous route” (see FIGS. 13 (i) and (h)). ).

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the red effect image, which is the background of the own character, occupying the liquid crystal screen 5 and the ratio of the blue effect image, which is the background of the enemy, occupying the liquid crystal screen 5 are changed during the pressing effect. Thus, an effect display in which red and blue are pressed against each other is executed. In addition, light emission control is performed to change the range between the red light emission portion and the blue light emission portion of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in synchronization with the effect display.

  Specifically, for example, at the start of the push-to-play effect, the left half of the liquid crystal screen 5 is occupied by the character and the red effect image, and the right half is occupied by the enemy and the blue effect image (FIG. 20 ( B)). When the user's character pushes the enemy, the effect display is performed in which the red effect image spreads to the right and the range of the red effect image expands. Immediately thereafter, the character is pushed by the enemy, and the effect display is performed in which the blue effect image spreads to the left and the range of the blue effect image expands. Such an effect display in which the own character and the enemy press against each other is executed alternately.

  In synchronism with this, the red light emitting portions such as the frame lamps 37A to 37C extend to the right to expand the red light emitting portion, and the blue light emitting portions such as the frame lamps 37A to 37C extend to the left to spread the blue light emitting portion. The production and the production are performed alternately. This makes it appear that red and blue are pushing each other in synchronization with the movement of the character and the enemy on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  The “own character advantageous route” according to FIG. 13 (i) is a route indicating that the own character is advantageous, the possibility that the own character wins the battle is relatively high, and the reliability is relatively high. is there. For example, when shifting to the own character advantageous route, an effect display in which the own character preempts and attacks the enemy is executed (see FIG. 20C).

  In the present embodiment, for example, it is easier to shift to the own character advantageous route at the time of a big hit than at the time of a loss. For this reason, when moving to the own character's advantageous route, the player may watch the battle going forward while having a sense of expectation and elation that it may be a big hit

  On the other hand, in the “own character disadvantageous route” according to FIG. 13H, the own character is disadvantageous, the possibility that the own character is defeated in the battle is relatively high, and the reliability is relatively low. It is a route that suggests. For example, when shifting to the own character disadvantageous route, an effect display in which the enemy preempts and attacks the own character is executed (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, for example, when a losing occurs, a shift to the own character disadvantageous route is easier than when a big hit occurs. For this reason, when shifting to the own character disadvantageous route, the player may watch the battle going forward while feeling anxiety and impatience such as loss.

  Note that during the push-to-play effect, the sound on the screen may be made to pay attention to the effect on the screen by not producing (or not at all) the effect sound such as BGM and the words of the character. As an example, when the BGM related to SPSP Reach 1 is output, the output of the BGM is stopped along with the start of the pressing effect. Then, the output of the BGM is restarted from a specific reproduction position in accordance with the end of the pushing effect. For example, when shifting to the own character unfavorable route, the output of the BGM is restarted at the first volume from the position where the output was stopped, and when shifting to the own character advantageous route, the rust is performed at a second volume higher than the first volume. The output of the BGM may be restarted from a portion.

  By the way, the SPSP reach 1 is an effect that indicates the degree of reliability by a plurality of branches such as the type of the enemy, the result of the pressing effect, and the like. Here, if the production proceeds smoothly, the SPSP reach 1 becomes monotonous, and there is a possibility that the player does not notice even if there is some kind of reliability suggestion because the production has no endurance. .

  Here, in the present embodiment, in any of the own character advantageous route and the own character disadvantageous route, any one of the three characters (that is, the characters A to C) as a friend of the own character enters the battle. The degree of reliability is suggested depending on whether or not they participate in the war (see FIG. 15A). Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately before the ally of the own character participates in the battle, a “cut-in effect” in which the character participating in the battle is highlighted and displayed in a short time is executed once, and some degree of reliability is suggested. The player is immediately made aware of the fact (see FIG. 13 (j)). The cut-in effect is one of the “advance effect”, and the advance effect is, for example, a variation display and a reach of the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) among the effects based on the judgment result of the special symbol judgment or the preliminary judgment information. It is a production other than a production. The mode of the cut-in effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Following the cut-in effect according to FIG. 13 (j), a button effect is executed at the end of the battle (ie, at the end of SPSP Reach 1) (see FIG. 13 (k)). In this embodiment, when SPSP reach 1 is executed, a button effect is always executed at the end of SPSP reach 1. The appearance timing of the button effect at the end of SPSP Reach 1 is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Although a more specific mode of the button effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the button effect of the present embodiment has three effect modes in which the emission colors of the button lamps 262 are different. One of the rendering modes is a mode in which the button lamp 262 emits light in a rainbow color (hereinafter, referred to as a “premier button rendering”) (see FIG. 16C). The premium button effect is executed only when a big hit is made. Here, the button effect may be executed a plurality of times at a timing before SPSP reach 1, such as before reaching or during normal reach. However, if the premiere button effect appears at an early timing, the player who recognizes that it will be a big hit will not be able to feel the thrilling feeling of the big hit in the subsequent effects. Also, if the premium button effect appears many times during one special symbol change display, not only the effect itself will not have a special feeling but also the player may get bored.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the premium button effect can be executed only once at the end of SPSP reach 1 in one special symbol change display, and does not appear at a timing earlier than that. Thus, the player can enjoy the game while feeling a thrilling feeling until the end of SPSP Reach 1. In addition, the premier button production can be made a rare production. It should be noted that the premier button effect may be executed before reaching, at the time of reaching, or during reach effects other than SPSP reach 1 (for example, during normal reach or during full rotation reach). Also, the premium button effect may be executed a plurality of times during one special symbol change display.

  The validity period ends at a predetermined end timing (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button effect) in response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the button effect according to FIG. In response to this, a winning action effect or a suggestion of a loss is performed (FIGS. 13 (l) and (o)). When the hit action effect is executed following the button effect, a direct hit occurs (FIG. 13 (k) → (l) → (m) → (n)). On the other hand, when a losing suggestion is performed following the button effect, a losing (FIG. 13 (k) → (o) → (p)) or a revival (FIG. 13 (k) → (o) → (p ) → (l) → (m) → (n)). Since the flow of the specific effect after the end of SPSP Reach 1 (that is, FIGS. 13 (f) to 13 (p)) has been described above, the description is omitted here.

[Example of cut-in production]
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of a cut-in effect performed during SPSP reach 1. The "cut-in effect" according to FIG. 13 (j) is to display an effect image showing the character illustrated in FIG. 14 during SPSP Reach 1 (during a battle), thereby indicating the degree of reliability to the player. It is a notice effect that can be grasped. In the present embodiment, a cut-in effect can be executed once during a single variable effect that executes SPSP Reach 1.

  As illustrated in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, four types of cut-in effects are prepared in advance, namely, a weak cut-in, a medium cut-in, a strong cut-in, and a premium cut-in. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, these four types of cut-in effects have different degrees of reliability. For example, the reliability is high in the order of weak cut-in <medium cut-in <strong cut-in <premier cut-in.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (A-1) and 14 (A-2), the weak cut-in is, for example, a face of character A and a blue character “End” (hereinafter, a blue character is a “blue character”). Is an effect in which a weak cut-in image 55 superimposed on a light blue effect image of a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. When the weak cut-in is executed, character A always appears during the battle (during SPSP Reach 1). For example, the weak cut-in image 55 is superimposed and displayed for one second before the effect image related to the battle (SPSP Reach 1) immediately before the character A participates in the battle as an ally of the character.

  In the weak cut-in, for example, an effect is output from the speaker 24 for 1 second from the beginning of the display of the weak cut-in image 55 to the character A's words “End” (hereinafter referred to as “weak cut-in sound”). It is.

  In the present embodiment, the light emission control related to the cut-in effect is executed with higher priority than the light emission control of the variable effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS reach 1. For this reason, during the weak cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit blue light for one second from the start of the display of the weak cut-in image 55 as illustrated in FIG. Light emission control for causing the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C to emit blue light is performed. Before and after the execution of the weak cut-in, the light emission of the frame member 3 and the like is controlled by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS reach 1.

  As described above, as the weak cut-in, for example, a blue character and a light blue effect image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear blue. For this reason, the weak cut-in is an effect that is expressed in blue as a whole, and the feature color representing the feature of the weak cut-in can be said to be blue.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (B-1) and (B-2), the middle cut-in is performed, for example, by using the face of the character B and a green character “do not lose” (hereinafter, a green character is referred to as a “green character”). ) Is an effect in which the medium cut-in image 56 superimposed on the light green effect image having a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. When the middle cut-in is executed, the character B always appears during the battle (during SPSP Reach 1). For example, the middle cut-in image 56 is superimposed and displayed for 1.5 seconds immediately before the effect image related to the battle immediately before the character B participates in the battle as an ally of the own character.

  The medium cut-in outputs, for example, a character B word “not lost” (hereinafter referred to as “medium cut-in sound”) from the speaker 24 for 1.5 seconds from the start of displaying the medium cut-in image 56. It is a production to do.

  As illustrated in FIG. 14 (B-2), during the middle cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit green light for 1.5 seconds from the start of the display of the middle cut-in image 56. Light emission control is performed so that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit green light. Note that before and after the execution of the medium cut-in, the light emission of the frame member 3 and the like is controlled by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission according to the SPPS reach 1.

  As described above, as the middle cut-in, for example, a green character and a light green effect image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear green. For this reason, the middle cut-in is an effect that is expressed in green as a whole, and the characteristic color representing the feature of the middle cut-in can be said to be green.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 14 (C-1) and 14 (C-2), the strong cut-in is, for example, the face of the character C and a red character “Gekkiatsu” (hereinafter, red characters are referred to as “red characters”). Is an effect in which the strong cut-in image 57 superimposed on the effect image of the rectangular zebra pattern elongated in the vertical direction is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, red characters displayed in the strong cut-in are relatively large characters, and are at least larger than blue characters related to the weak cut-in and green characters related to the medium cut-in. When the strong cut-in is executed, the character C always appears during the battle (during SPSP Reach 1). For example, the strong cut-in image 57 is superimposed and displayed 1.8 seconds before the effect image related to the battle immediately before the character C participates in the battle as an ally of the own character (see FIG. 22D).

  In the strong cut-in, for example, a line of the character C called “Gekkiatsu” (hereinafter referred to as a “strong cut-in sound”) is output from the speaker 24 for 1.8 seconds from the start of the display of the strong cut-in image 57. It is a production to do.

  As illustrated in FIG. 14 (C-2), during the strong cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to emit red light for 1.8 seconds from the start of the display of the strong cut-in image 57. Light emission control for causing the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C to emit red light is performed. Before and after the execution of the strong cut-in, the light emission of the frame member 3 and the like is controlled by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS reach 1.

  As described above, as the strong cut-in, for example, a relatively large red character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like is performed so that the frame member 3 and the like appear red. For this reason, the strong cut-in is an effect expressed in red as a whole, and it can be said that the characteristic color representing the feature of the strong cut-in is red.

  By the way, if the cut-in effect is configured to only display the characters appearing in the SPSP reach 1, the player may become accustomed to the cut-in effect and may not have a thrilling feeling in the subsequent development. However, if a character unrelated to the battle is displayed by the cut-in effect instead of the character participating in the battle, the effect may be complicated and difficult to understand.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, only in the case of a big hit, as a cut-in effect, a premium character D for notifying the fact that the character does not participate in the battle in place of the character participating in the battle but that the big hit is confirmed is set for a relatively short time (in the present embodiment, By executing the premier cut-in displayed for 0.8 seconds), the cut-in effect is made an unexpected effect (see FIG. 14 (D-1)).

  Here, the premier character D functions as a character that notifies that the big hit is determined in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. The player who has noticed that the jackpot has been confirmed by the display of the premier character D can watch the progress of the variable effect while having a sense of excitement for the jackpot. However, a player who does not know what character the premier character D is may lose interest in the game without noticing that the big hit is confirmed even when the premier character D is displayed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a rainbow effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order to notify that the big hit has been determined, along with the display of the premium character D. Along with this, light emission control is performed to cause the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C to emit light in rainbow color so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 emit light in rainbow color. This makes it easier for a player who does not know what kind of character the premier character D is to know to be a jackpot.

  As exemplified in FIGS. 14 (C-1) and (C-2), the premier cut-in includes, for example, the face of the premiere character D and the rainbow-colored character “ Is called a “rainbow character”.) Is an effect in which the premier cut-in image 58 superimposed on the trapezoidal rainbow effect image elongated in the horizontal direction is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 for 0.8 seconds.

  For example, the rainbow characters displayed in the premium cut-in are relatively large (for example, the same size as the red characters related to the strong cut-in), and are at least larger than the characters related to the weak cut-in and the medium cut-in. Therefore, even if the display time is relatively short, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the character.

  In the present embodiment, the premier cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on the near side of the effect image related to the battle immediately before any one of the characters A to C enters the battle as an ally of the own character. (See FIG. 20D). When the premier cut-in is executed, the premiere character D does not appear during the battle (during SPSP Reach 1), and any one of the characters A to C appears instead.

  For the premier cut-in, for example, an effect sound of “queen” (hereinafter, referred to as “premier cut-in sound”) notifying that the jackpot has been determined since the start of the display of the premier cut-in image 58 is output from the speaker 24. This is an effect that outputs for 1.8 seconds. In the present embodiment, since the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is relatively short, a sound different from the character string indicated by the premier cut-in image 58 (i.e., the rainbow character "yatta") is defined as the premier cut-in sound. Output.

  Note that the same sound as the character string indicated by the premium cut-in image 58 may be output as the premium cut-in sound. Specifically, for example, from the start of the display of the premier cut-in image 58, the words of the premier character D “Ya-ya” may be output from the speaker 24 for 1.8 seconds.

  As illustrated in FIG. 14 (C-2), during the premier cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 are illuminated in a rainbow color for 2 seconds from the start of the display of the premier cut-in image 58 so as to appear to emit light. Light emission control is performed so that the lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in rainbow colors. Before and after the execution of the premier cut-in, the light emission of the frame member 3 and the like is controlled to a color other than the rainbow color by the variation effect corresponding light emission according to the SPSP reach 1.

  In the present embodiment, regarding the premier cut-in, the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 <the output time of the premier cut-in sound <the rainbow light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is predetermined (FIG. 14 ( D-2)). The rainbow image display start timing, the rainbow emission start timing, and the premier cut-in sound output start timing are all at the time of the premier cut-in start. With such a configuration, for example, even if the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is relatively short (for example, 0.8 seconds), the output of the premier cut-in sound and the frame member can be performed even after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 is completed. Third rainbow emission continues. As a result, after the display of the premier cut-in image 58 is completed, the player is notified that the premier cut-in has been executed by the combination of the cut-in sound and the iridescent light emission (that is, it has been notified that the jackpot has been determined). It is possible to grasp. The other relationship between the display time of the premium cut-in image 58, the output time of the premium cut-in sound, and the rainbow emission time of the frame member 3 and the like will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the cut-in effect, for example, the size of the cut-in image, the length of the output time of the cut-in sound, and the length of the light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like according to each characteristic color indicate high reliability. . The size of each cut-in image is larger in the order of the weak cut-in image 55 <the medium cut-in image 56 <the strong cut-in image 57 <the premier cut-in image 58. The length of the light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is longer in the order of cut-in <medium cut-in <strong cut-in <premier cut-in. The length of output time of each cut-in sound is longer in the order of weak cut-in sound <medium cut-in sound <strong cut-in sound <premier cut-in sound. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to experience a high degree of reliability with a synergistic effect of the information from the sight and the information from the hearing.

  In the present embodiment, in cut-in effects other than the premier cut-in, the display time of each cut-in image is long in the order of the weak cut-in image 55 <the medium cut-in image 56 <the strong cut-in image 57, and the display time of the cut-in image is long. It is set in advance so that the reliability increases as the length increases. Here, since the premier character D is a character that does not participate in the battle and is not related to the battle, it may not be preferable to display the character on the liquid crystal screen 5 for a long time (for example, 1.8 seconds) during the battle. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the premier cut-in is set in advance so that the display time of the cut-in image is shorter than that of the weak cut-in image 55 (see FIG. 14). For this reason, the relationship of the cut-in image display time is in the order of the premier cut-in image 58 <the weak cut-in image 55 <the medium cut-in image 56 <the strong cut-in image 57.

  The display time of each cut-in image may be in any relationship. For example, the display time may be long in the order of the weak cut-in image 55 <the medium cut-in image 56 <the strong cut-in image 57 <the premier cut-in image 58. Good.

  In addition, the size of the cut-in image for each cut-in, the length of the output time of the cut-in sound, and the length of the light-emitting time of the frame member 3 and the like for each characteristic color may be in any relationship. For example, it is not necessary to suggest a high degree of reliability by these. For example, the size of the cut-in image for each cut-in, the output time of the cut-in sound, and the light emission time of the frame member 3 etc. May be the same. In addition, the higher the reliability, the smaller each cut-in image may be, or the cut-in sound and the light emission time of the frame member or the like may be shorter.

  In addition, during the premier cut-in effect, another light emitting means that can emit light may emit light in a rainbow color. For example, the light emission control may be performed so that the acting character 7 that is not operating during the premier cut-in effect looks like a rainbow color. May be.

  In addition, the position where the cut-in image related to each cut-in is displayed is not limited to a position that does not overlap with the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 (specifically, the position illustrated in FIG. 14), but overlaps with the decorative symbol 501. It may be a position, a position overlapping with the small symbol 502, or a position overlapping both the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. In such a case, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be displayed on the near side of the cut-in image. Thus, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 can be visually recognized even while the cut-in image is being displayed. Further, a cut-in image may be displayed in a superimposed manner on the near side of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. Thus, there is no possibility that the visibility of the cut-in image is reduced by the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502. Even in such a case, since the fourth symbol is variably displayed on the nearer side than other images including the cut-in image, it is possible to recognize that the variable symbol is being displayed by visually recognizing the fourth symbol. Alternatively, the cut-in image may be displayed on the near side of the decorative pattern 501 and the small pattern 502 may be displayed on the near side of the cut-in image. Thus, the cut-in image can be displayed without worrying about the display position of the decorative symbol 501, and it can be recognized that the variable symbol is being displayed by visually recognizing the small symbol 502.

  When the reliability is equal to or higher than the predetermined reliability (for example, the reliability is 100%), the cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the near side of the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502, and the reliability is higher than the predetermined reliability. When it is low, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be displayed in a superimposed manner on the front side of the cut-in image.

[Relationship of production mode between SPSP Reach 1 and cut-in production]
FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of the relationship between the content of SPSP Reach 1 and the mode of the cut-in effect. As illustrated in FIG. 15A, in the present embodiment, when a character other than the premium cut-in effect is executed as the cut-in effect, the characters (specifically, characters A to character) displayed in the executed cut-in effect Any one character of C) always participates in the battle between the character and the enemy.

  On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 15B, when the premium cut-in is executed as a cut-in effect, the premier character D displayed in the executed cut-in effect does not participate in the battle between the character and the enemy. . Instead, any one of the characters A to C enters the battle, and the character wins the enemy and becomes a big hit.

  As described above, the cut-in effect functions as an effect that suggests a character appearing during a period other than the cut-in effect during the period of SPSP Reach 1, and the above character is not suggested but a jackpot is determined. It may function as an effect that suggests that

  With reference to FIG. 15C, an example of the ratio of the appearance of the characters A to C in the SPSP reach 1 will be described. For example, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 performs a lottery using the variable effect pattern random number (one of the random numbers for effect control) to perform the random display of the first special symbol related to the variable display. A variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, when the variable effect pattern that can execute the SPSP Reach 1 is determined, the type of the character participating in the battle between the character and the enemy is uniquely determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the battle result is a victory, that is, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and there are the following two types of variation effects in which the SPSP reach 1 can be executed.
A “direct hit” pattern in which the own character defeats the enemy without executing a loss suggestion (see FIGS. 23 (G) and (H)) that pretends that the own character has been defeated by the enemy and the loss has been reported.
(FIG. 13 (f) → (g) → (i) (or (h)) → (j) → (k) → (l) → (m) → (n))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern: A11, see FIG. 9D)
A “resurrection hit” pattern in which, by executing a hit action effect and a victory effect via a suggestion of a loss, an effect display is performed as if the own character defeated the enemy and the jackpot was restored.
(FIG. 13 (f) → (g) → (i) or (h) → (j) → (k) → (o) → (p) → (l) → (m) → (n))
(Corresponding fluctuation pattern: A13, see FIG. 9D)

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, the ratio of the variable effect pattern relating to the direct hit to the variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable effect for notifying the jackpot in SPSP Reach 1 is 80%, and The ratio occupied by the fluctuation effect patterns is 20%.

  Although a specific determination method will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, among the variable effect patterns related to the direct hit, it corresponds to the variable effect pattern in which any one of the characters A to C participates in the battle. For example, the mode of the cut-in effect is determined by a notice effect pattern determination process described later so that the premium cut-in can be executed at a rate of, for example, 2%. As exemplified in FIG. 15 (C), the ratio of the variable effect pattern in which the character A participates in the battle (that is, the variable effect pattern capable of executing the weak cut-in) in the variable effect pattern related to the direct hit is occupied. For example, it is 21%. Further, the ratio of the variable effect pattern in which character B participates in the battle (that is, the variable effect pattern capable of executing the medium cut-in) is, for example, 30%, and the variable effect pattern in which character C participates in the battle (ie, the strong cut-in). Is a variable effect pattern which can be executed) is, for example, 47%.

  Also, for example, among the variable effect patterns related to the resurrection hit, the premium cut-in is executed at a rate of, for example, 1% corresponding to the variable effect pattern in which any one of the characters A to C participates in the battle. The mode of the cut-in effect is determined so as to be possible. It should be noted that, among the variable effect patterns related to the resurrection, the ratio of the variable effect pattern capable of executing the weak cut-in is, for example, 60%, and the ratio of the variable effect pattern capable of executing the medium cut-in is, for example, 24%. is there. In addition, the ratio occupied by the variable effect patterns capable of executing the strong cut-in is, for example, 15%.

  In addition, the premium cut-in is not executed based on the losing variation effect pattern in which the battle result is defeat (that is, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is losing and SPSP reach 1 can be executed), The rate at which the premium cut-in is controlled to be executable is 0%. It should be noted that, among such loss-making variation effect patterns, the ratio of the variation effect pattern capable of executing the weak cut-in is 80%, for example, and the ratio of the variation effect pattern capable of executing the medium cut-in is 15%, for example. It is. In addition, the ratio occupied by the variable effect patterns capable of executing the strong cut-in is, for example, 5%.

  In the present embodiment, the premier cut-in is easier to execute in the case of a direct hit than in the case of a resurrection. Also, in the present embodiment, in the case of a direct hit, the strong cut-in is easier to be executed than the weak cut-in or the medium cut-in, and in the case of the resurrection, the weak cut-in is better than the medium cut-in or the strong cut-in. Is also easy to execute.

  In the case of a direct hit, the premier cut-in may be controlled to be executable, whereas in the case of a revival, the execution of the premium cut-in may be suppressed. In addition, the premium cut-in may be easier to be executed in the case of the restoration hit than in the case of the direct hit, and the execution probability of the premium cut-in may not be different depending on whether the hit is the direct hit or the restoration hit. Note that the ratio described with reference to FIG. 15C is merely an example, and any ratio may be used.

  It should be noted that the effect contents of the SPSP Reach 1 and the mode of the cut-in effect need not be related. For example, as long as it is a variable effect pattern that can execute SPSP Reach 1, the mode of the cut-in effect may be determined by random number lottery based on whether or not it is a jackpot, regardless of the effect content. As an example, even if the variation pattern corresponding to the variation effect is a variation effect pattern in which character A participates in the battle, a strong cut-in displaying character C may be executed during the battle.

[Example of button production]
FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of a button effect performed at the end of SPSP Reach 1. The button effect according to FIG. 13 (k) is performed by displaying the button image 51 illustrated in FIGS. 16 (A) to 16 (C) during the SPSP Reach 1 (during the battle) or the like. This is an effect that prompts an operation, and is an announcement effect that allows a player to grasp the level of reliability.

  The button production is performed when the end timing of a predetermined valid period (for example, 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button production) has arrived, or when the valid period ends in response to the operation of the production button 26 during the valid period. Exit immediately.

  As illustrated in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, three types of button effects, a weak button effect, a strong button effect, and a premium button effect, are prepared in advance. These three types of button effects have different degrees of reliability. For example, the reliability is high in the order of weak button effect <strong button effect <premier button effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 16A, the weak button effect includes, for example, a button image 51 that imitates the effect button 26 in a normal state in which light emission is controlled to a white color that is not operated, a gauge image 52 indicating a validity period, and the like. , And an operation instruction of “press!” Is displayed near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. These three types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the weak button effect, and continue to be displayed until the validity period ends (see FIG. 16D).

  The weak button effect is, for example, an effect in which the self-character line “press” (hereinafter referred to as “operation instruction sound”) is output from the speaker 24 for one second from the start of displaying the button image 51.

  In the weak button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16D, the effect button 26 controlled to the normal state appears to emit white light from the start of display of the button image 51 to the end of the valid period. The light emission of the button lamp 262 is controlled. Further, from the start of displaying the button image 51 to the end of the valid period, the lamps other than the button lamp 262 (for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C) are turned off. Thereby, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the effect button 26.

  As illustrated in FIG. 16B, the strong button effect is, for example, a button image 51 simulating the effect button 26 in a protruding state controlled to emit light in red, a gauge image 52, and an operation instruction “press!”. Is displayed near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Like the weak button effect, these three types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the strong button effect and continue to be displayed until the end of the valid period (see FIG. 16D).

  The strong button effect is, for example, an effect in which, from the start of the display of the button image 51, the character of the character “press” (that is, the operation instruction sound) is output from the speaker 24 for one second, similarly to the weak button effect.

  In the strong button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16D, the effect button 26 controlled to be in the protruding state appears to emit red light from the start of the display of the button image 51 to the end of the effective period. The light emission of the button lamp 262 is controlled. Also, from the start of displaying the button image 51 to the end of the valid period, the lamps other than the button lamp 262 (for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C) are turned off in the same manner as in the weak button effect.

  The premium button effect illustrated in FIG. 16C is an effect that notifies that the jackpot has been determined in the present embodiment. The premier button effect includes, for example, a button image 51 simulating a projecting effect button 26 in a projected state controlled to emit light in a rainbow color, a gauge image 52, and a text of an operation instruction “press!” Near the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Is an effect to be displayed. In the premier button effect, a rainbow effect image is superimposed and displayed behind the button image 51, the gauge image, and the characters of the operation instruction. These four types of effect images are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 from the start of the premier button effect, and continue to be displayed until the end of the effective period.

  Also, in the premier button effect, as illustrated in FIG. 16 (E), the effect button 26 controlled to the protruding state appears to emit rainbow light from the start of displaying the button image 51 to the end of the valid period. The light emission of the button lamp 262 is controlled. In addition, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 emit light in a rainbow color.

  In addition, unlike the weak button effect and the strong button effect, for example, the premier button effect is an effect in which a “fixed sound” of “Cuin” is output from the speaker 24 for 0.5 second from the start of the display of the button image 51. The “confirmed sound” is, for example, an effect sound for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, and is an effect sound different from the operation instruction sound.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (F), the premium button effect is controlled so as to be executable only in the direct change effect, and is controlled so as not to be executable in the rebirth change effect. Therefore, immediately after the end of the premier button effect, the hit operation effect according to FIG. 13 (l) is always executed. Thus, the display of the rainbow effect image and the emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 in the rainbow color continue from the start of the premier button effect to the hit operation effect. It can be performed. This clarifies the continuity between the premier button effect and the hit action effect, and it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of excitement for the big hit due to the synergistic effect of these two effects.

  In the present embodiment, during the premier button effect, the staging part 7 operated in the hit operation effect immediately after the premier button effect is turned off without light emission control so as to look like a rainbow. This makes it possible to control the light emission so that the staging part 7 looks rainbow-colored at the start of the hitting action effect, and to operate the staging part 7, thereby increasing the impact that the hitting action effect has on the player. Is possible.

  In the premier button effect according to the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which characters of operation instructions different from those of the weak button effect and the strong button effect are displayed and a confirmation sound is output so as to increase the special feeling of the effect. Note that, as the premier button effect, characters of the same operation instruction as in the weak button effect and the strong button effect (in the present embodiment, the character “press!”) May be displayed, or instead of the final sound (or final sound) The operation instruction sound may be output from the speaker 24 for one second.

  In the present embodiment, during the button effect, sound effects such as BGM and character dialogue are not output from the speaker 24 as much as possible (or not at all), and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are basically turned off. . By setting such a state during the button effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect button 26 which is emitting light.

  In the present embodiment, regarding the premier button effect, when the player operates after one second from the start of the premier button effect and when the player does not operate, the output time of the definite sound <the button image 51 with the rainbow effect image Are determined in advance such that the relationship of display time of i.e. = rainbow light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is satisfied (see FIG. 16E). Due to such a relationship, the display of the button image 51 is continued even after the output of the final sound is completed, and the frame member 3 and the like continue to emit rainbow light. Thus, for example, after the player's attention is directed to the gaming machine 1 by outputting a relatively short confirmation sound, it is possible to cause the player to operate the effect button 26 while recognizing that the jackpot is confirmed. .

  It should be noted that the frame lamps 37 and the like continue to emit rainbow light by the light emission control according to the hit operation effect even when the light emission control according to the premier button effect ends. For this reason, taking into account even after the end of the premier button effect, when the player operates after 1 second from the start of the premier button effect and when the player does not operate, the output time of the definite sound <the rainbow effect image is accompanied. The relationship of display time of the button image 51 and the like <rainbow light emission time of the frame member 3 and the like is established.

  In the present embodiment, even when the player operates from the start of the button effect until the output of the operation instruction sound (or confirmation sound) is completed, the output of the operation instruction sound (or confirmation sound) is It continues until the output of the sound is completed. On the other hand, the effect image related to the button effect is immediately deleted according to the operation, and the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like related to the button effect is immediately terminated according to the operation. With such a configuration, the next effect can be started immediately in response to the operation of the player, and an incomplete situation in which the operation instruction sound (or the confirmation sound) is output only halfway does not occur.

  For example, when the player operates from the start of the premier button effect to the time when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the display time of the button image 51 or the like accompanied by the iridescent effect image = rainbow color of the frame member 3 or the like related to the premier button effect The relationship of the light emission time <the output time of the final sound is established. When the premier button effect is also considered, the relationship of display time of the button image 51 or the like accompanied by the rainbow effect image <output time of the definite sound <rainbow light emission time of the frame member 3 or the like is satisfied.

  With the above-described configuration, the flow from the premier button effect to the hit action effect becomes smooth, and it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the flow of the effect is not smooth and the interest is reduced.

  The other relationship between the display time of the button image 51, the output time of the confirmation sound, and the rainbow emission time of the frame member 3 and the like will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 which is a modification of the cut-in effect. I do.

  An example of the execution ratio of the button effect will be described with reference to FIG. A specific determination method will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 performs a button effect by random number lottery based on the variable effect pattern determined at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the weak button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 46% in accordance with the direct effect fluctuating effect pattern in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and SPSP Reach 1 can be executed. The strong button effect is determined at a rate of 52%, for example, the premium button effect is determined at a rate of 2%.

  In addition, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and the weak button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 70%, for example, 30%, corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern per resurrection that can execute SPSP Reach 1. The ratio is determined to be a strong button effect, for example, a ratio of 0% is determined to be a premium button effect (ie, not determined to be a premium button effect).

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, and a weak button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 90%, and a strong button effect is determined at a rate of, for example, 10%, corresponding to a variable effect pattern in which SPSP reach 1 can be executed. The button effect is determined, for example, the premium button effect is determined at a rate of 0% (ie, it is not determined to be the premium button effect).

  By determining the mode of the button effect at such a ratio, in the present embodiment, it is notified that a direct hit is achieved in the premium button effect.

  It should be noted that the premier button effect may be controlled to be executable also in the case of the resurrection hit, or the possibility of a simple jackpot may be indicated by the mode of the button effect regardless of whether it is a direct hit or a resurrection hit. The ratio described with reference to FIG. 16F is merely an example, and any ratio may be used.

  During the button production, the production button 26 is operated by alternately switching and displaying the button image 51 and the image imitating the production button 26 in the operated state (that is, the pressed state) at the same position. May be displayed, and the player may be prompted to perform a button operation during the valid period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol 501 is hidden when the button effect is started, but the decorative symbol 501 (specifically, the reach symbol) may be displayed during the button effect.

  In the present embodiment, a “button suggestion effect” indicating that the button effect is started is executed (see FIG. 20F). The button suggestion effect is a notice effect that is executed immediately before the start of the button effect to emphasize the button effect, and is executed one second before the start timing of the button effect at the end of the battle (SPSP reach 1). In the button suggestion effect, for example, with the start of the button suggestion effect, the effect image related to the battle representing the character or the enemy stops and fades out to white. The white effect image displayed in this way is displayed behind the image related to the button effect from the start to the end of the button effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 501 is hidden with the start of the button suggestion effect, but the decorative symbol 501 (specifically, the reach symbol) may be displayed during the button suggestion effect.

[Ramp control example of a variable effect that executes a premium cut-in / premier button effect]
With reference to FIG. 17, an example of a ramp control in a variable effect in which a premium cut-in is executed as a cut-in effect and a premium button effect is executed as a button effect will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of lamp control in a variable effect in which a big hit is notified via a premium cut-in and a premium button effect.

  FIG. 17 shows, among the flows exemplified in FIG. 13, FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c), (d), (s), (v), (e), (f), and (g). , (I), (j), (k), (l), (m), and (n). In this specific example, the description of the preview effect other than the premium cut-in and the premium button effect is omitted.

  The fluctuation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 17A and 17B can be executed in accordance with the jackpot fluctuation pattern A11 of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9D). For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into a SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy fight through the normal reach and the SP reach at the time of the start of the change effect, and notifies the big hit at the end of the SPSP reach 1. It is assumed that the effect pattern has been determined. Also, it is assumed that it is determined that the premium cut-in is executed as the cut-in effect and the premium button effect is executed as the button effect at the start of the variable effect. FIG. 17A shows a specific example in which the player does not operate the effect button 26 during the premier button effect. FIG. 17B is different from the example of FIG. 17A only in that the player operates the effect button 26 during the premier button effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 17A, for example, after the variable effect starts along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the reach is reached at a predetermined timing (for example, 11 seconds after the start of the variable effect). It is established and normal reach is started. And from normal reach to SP reach. During that time, the frame member 3 and the like do not emit light in rainbow colors because the light emission is controlled by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to these effects.

  The SP reach reaches SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy battle, and a premium cut-in is started during SPSP reach 1. From the start of the SPSP Reach 1 to the start of the Premier Cut-in, the frame member 3 and the like do not emit light in the rainbow color because the light emission is controlled by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS Reach 1.

  In the present embodiment, when both the SPSP reach 1 and the premier cut-in are executed simultaneously, the liquid crystal screen 5 is superimposed on the front side of the effect image related to the battle (SPSP reach 1), and the premier cut-in image is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 20D and FIG. 22D). In the present embodiment, light emission control in rainbow colors according to the premium cut-in is preferentially performed without performing light emission control according to SPSP reach 1. For this reason, from the start of the premier cut-in, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 emit light so that they look rainbow. After the end of the display of the premier cut-in image 58 (see FIG. 14D-1), the light emission control in the rainbow color is ended. Therefore, after the end of the display of the premier cut-in image 58, the frame is displayed during the display of the effect image relating to the battle. The member 3 and the like emit rainbow light for 1.2 seconds (see FIGS. 17A and 14D-2).

  From the end of the light emission control related to the premier cut-in, the light emission control of the frame member 3 and the like is performed with the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS reach 1, so that the frame member 3 does not emit light in rainbow colors.

  As illustrated in FIG. 17A, a button suggestion effect is started at the end of SPSP Reach 1. In the present embodiment, from the start of the button suggestion effect to the start of the button effect, the light emission control for the button suggestion effect has priority over the light emission control for the variable effect corresponding light emission according to the SPSP reach 1. For example, during the button suggestion effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to blink white at regular intervals. When the premium button effect is started following the button suggestion effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in rainbow colors.

  When the operation timing of the effect button 26 is two seconds before the start of the premier button effect, the rainbow control time for the premier button effect is less than 2 seconds (see FIG. 17B). In addition, when the operation timing is 2 seconds after the start of the premium button effect, the emission control time of the rainbow color related to the premium button effect is 2 seconds, and the operation timing is 2 seconds after the start of the premium button effect. In the case of, the time of light emission control in rainbow colors related to the Premier Button effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds. In addition, when the effect button 26 is not operated during the premier button effect, the rainbow-colored light emission control time for the premier button effect is 3 seconds (see FIGS. 17A and 16E). As described above, the time of the light emission control in the rainbow color according to the premier button effect is variable, and is different from the premium cut-in in which the light emission control time in the rainbow color is fixed at 2 seconds (FIG. 14 (D- 2)).

  With the end of the light emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the premier button effect, the light emission control in the rainbow color in response to the start of the hit operation effect is executed. In the present embodiment, since the hit action effect is started immediately after the end of the premier button effect, the light emission control in the rainbow colors for these two effects is continuous. For this reason, the emission control in the rainbow color started with the start of the premier button effect continues even after the end of the premier button effect, and the relationship of the execution time of the premier button effect <the iridescent time of the frame member 3 or the like is satisfied. Holds.

  In the present embodiment, based on the variable effect pattern at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, a hit operation effect when there is no operation from the player (the execution time in this case is 5 seconds: FIG. 17 ( Three seconds before the start timing of A)) is set as the start timing of the valid period of three seconds. That is, unless the effect button 26 is operated during the button effect (that is, during the valid period), the hit operation effect is started with the arrival of three seconds from the start of the button effect (FIG. 17A). reference). On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is operated during the valid period, a hit operation effect is started at a timing corresponding to the operation (see FIG. 17B). For this reason, a deviation occurs in the start timing of the winning action effect depending on the operation timing during the valid period and the presence or absence of the operation during the valid period. In the present embodiment, the deviation is absorbed by the execution time of the hit operation effect.

  In the present embodiment, the hit operation effect sound is output from the speaker 24 at an output time corresponding to the execution time of the hit operation effect (see FIGS. 17A and 17B). The hit operation sound may be output from the speaker 24 for a fixed output time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the hit operation effect.

  The start timing of the hit action effect that occurs depending on the presence or absence of an operation during the button effect, depending on the period during which the temporary stop display is performed in the big hit mode (that is, the execution time of the successful effect) immediately before the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) is stopped and displayed. May be absorbed.

  With the end of the rainbow-colored emission control at the start of the winning action effect, the rainbow-colored emission control at the start of the winning effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the victory effect is started immediately after the end of the hit operation effect, so that the light emission control in the rainbow colors for these two effects is continuous. Light emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the winning effect is continued until the start of the re-change effect. In the present embodiment, a hit notification based on symbol alignment is performed with the start of the victory effect. From the start of the victory effect to the end of the victory effect, the reach symbol 501B is displayed small in the upper corner of the screen, while the medium decoration symbol 501B is displayed large in the center of the screen (see FIG. 21C). Then, along with the end of the victory effect, three decorative symbols 501 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line at the center of the screen (see FIG. 21D).

  As illustrated in FIG. 17A, when the re-fluctuation effect is started, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light. As illustrated in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the present embodiment, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow light from the start of the premier button effect to the start of the re-change effect. Therefore, during these effects, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. On the other hand, the button lamp 262 emits light in a rainbow color from the start of the premier button effect to the end of the hit operation effect, and is turned off at the start of the victory effect, so that the effect button 26 is more rainbow-colored than the gaming board 2 and the frame member 3. Light emission time is short.

  When a successful effect is started following the re-fluctuation effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are illuminated in rainbow with the start of the successful effect. For this reason, after the light emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the winning effect ends, the light emission control in the rainbow color starts in the start of the successful effect. The emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the successful effect is continued until the stop-displayed decorative symbol 501 is deleted. As the decorative pattern 501 is deleted, an opening effect dedicated to the 6R probability change that notifies that the jackpot game related to the 6R probability change has started is started (see FIGS. 21 (H) and (I)). . In the present embodiment, with the end of the rainbow-colored emission control at the start of the winning effect, the rainbow-colored emission control at the start of the 6R-probable-change-only opening effect is executed. In the light emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the opening effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit the light in the rainbow color. For this reason, the light emission control in the rainbow color started with the start of the victory effect is continued even after the start of the opening effect. Thereafter, with the start of a predetermined (for example, 1R) round game, the emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in rainbow colors ends. Along with this, light emission control with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) corresponding to the predetermined round game is started. After that, the effect of displaying the character “Aim for V” on the liquid crystal screen 5 to prompt a V prize is started, and when the V prize is won, an effect image for notifying the V prize in accordance with the V prize (for example, a rainbow effect image) Is started, and the V winning lamp (not shown), the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the start-up lamp 38 emit light in rainbow colors. The light emission in the rainbow color continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the V prize has been won and that the game mode will be shifted to the probable change mode (ie, the probable change game state) immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, when the failure effect is started following the re-fluctuation effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit blue light with the start of the failure effect. The blue light emission control accompanying the start of the failed effect is continued until the stopped and displayed decorative symbol 501 is deleted. As the decorative pattern 501 is deleted, an opening effect (not shown) that indicates that the possibility of a jackpot related to 6R time reduction is very high is started. With the start of the opening effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit blue light.
In the case of the big hit game related to the 6R probability change, an effect that notifies that the big hit game related to the 6R certainty change is being executed from the start of the predetermined (for example, the 3R) round game (for example, the effect of blinking various lamps in yellow) ) Is started. Thereafter, an effect for prompting a V prize is started. When the V prize is won, display of an effect image for notifying the V prize is started in accordance with the V prize, and a V prize lamp (not shown), board lamps 25A and 25B, and a frame. The lamps 37A to 37C and the starting port lamp 38 start emitting light in rainbow colors. The light emission in the rainbow color continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).

  As illustrated in FIG. 17 (A), the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, the hit action effect, the victory effect, the hit notification, and the successful effect are performed during one variable effect (that is, one time of the first special symbol). (During variable display). On the other hand, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in rainbow colors can be executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect. In the present embodiment, at the start of the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, the hit operation effect, the victory effect, the hit notification, and the successful effect, light emission control in a rainbow color accompanying the start of each effect is executed. The light emission control in rainbow colors according to these effects may use different light emission patterns or the same light emission pattern.

[Specific example of a floating production that executes a premium cut-in / premier button production]
With reference to FIGS. 18 to 21, a specific example of a variable effect in which a premium cut-in is executed as a cut-in effect, and two weak button effects and one premium button effect are executed as a button effect will be described. . FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example in a case where an effect notifying that the jackpot has been determined is not executed from the start of the variable effect to the end of the normal reach. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example from the time of SP reach development to the present notification or the development of SPSP reach. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed via the premium cut-in after SPSP reach 1 development (until immediately before the start of the button effect in SPSP reach 1). FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example from the start of the premier button effect to the notification of the jackpot at the end of SPSP Reach 1 and the start of the jackpot game. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 18 to 23, the notation of the number indicating the number of reserved special symbol determinations is omitted for the purpose of making the drawings easy to see. In the examples of FIGS. 18 to 23, during the special symbol change display, a blue character “2” representing the special 1 reserved number is always displayed immediately above the small symbol 502, and the special 2 reserved number is displayed immediately above the small symbol 502. It is assumed that the red character “0” is always displayed.

  The fluctuation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 18 to 21 are the same as those in FIG. 17, and include the flow illustrated in FIG. 13, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), (b), (c), (d), (s), (V), (e), (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), and (n). Is shown.

  The variation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 18 to 21 can be executed in correspondence with the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol, as in FIG. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into SPSP reach 1 in which the character and the enemy F fight via the normal reach and the SP reach at the start of the variable effect, and notifies the jackpot at the end of the SPSP reach 1. It is assumed that the fluctuation effect pattern has been determined. In this specific example, it is assumed that, at the start of the variable effect, it is determined in advance that two button effects, a “mini-character effect”, a premium cut-in, and a premium button effect are to be executed. Also, since this fluctuation effect pattern corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation pattern A11, the “pseudo continuous effect” is executed twice during the fluctuation effect (see FIG. 9D).

The “mini-character effect” is, for example, a notice effect in which a character different from a character (for example, own character and an enemy) that plays an active part in the reach effect is displayed to indicate the reliability of the jackpot. It is a production. There are the following four types of characters displayed in mini-character effects.
・ Small birds suggesting low reliability (see Fig. 18 (A))
・ Dinosaur suggesting high reliability (Fig. 19 (C))
・ Premier character F (Fig. 20 (C)) and big bird (Fig. 28 (B)) suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed

  In addition, the aspect of the character displayed in the mini-character effect is not limited to the above, and may be any type. For example, the character indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed may be an extremely small bird, or may be a character (for example, Premier Character F) displayed for a moment (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, even if a character indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed by the mini-character effect, the frame lamp 37 and the like do not emit a rainbow light to indicate the reliability of the mini-character effect. Even if a character that is not determined to be a big hit is displayed in the mini-character effect, the light emission of the frame lamp 37 and the like is not controlled in a manner that suggests the reliability of the mini-character effect.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effects indicating that the jackpot is confirmed are prepared, but various lamps do not emit rainbow colors in all effects, but various lamps emit rainbow colors only in some effects. I do. For example, in a mini-character effect, a character indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed. However, in the mini-character effect, for example, a confirmed sound indicating that the jackpot is determined is not output from the speaker 24 as in the case of the premier button effect, and the frame lamp 37 and the like are not emitted in rainbow colors. In this way, by making the staging means used to indicate that the jackpot is confirmed, the player is made to feel slightly uncomfortable and motivated to be interested in learning the gaming machine 1 deeply. It is possible. The method of suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed is not limited to the method of suggesting only by displaying the effect image, but the method of suggesting only by outputting the effect sound from the speaker 24, or the method of emitting various lamps in rainbow colors. There are also ways to suggest. Further, the present invention can also be realized by combining two types of methods of displaying the effect image, outputting the effect sound, and emitting light in the rainbow color.

  The “simulated continuous production” (see FIG. 18) is an production in which all of the temporarily-displayed decorative symbols 501 (specifically, the left decorative symbol 501A, the middle decorative symbol 501B, and the right decorative symbol 501C) are restarted. is there. For example, when the decorative symbol 501 is restarted once by the pseudo continuous production, it appears as if the decorative symbol 501 was displayed twice in a variable manner during the single variable display of the special symbol. Note that the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol 501 performed by the N-th pseudo continuous production (N-th restart) is referred to as the “fake N + 1-th fluctuating display”. For example, the variable display of the decorative pattern 501 performed by the first pseudo continuous production (first restart) is referred to as the “pseudo second consecutive” fluctuation display, and the second pseudo continuous production (second restart). The variable display of the decorative pattern 501 performed by the above is referred to as the “pseudo-third consecutive” variable display.

  A specific example of the pseudo continuous production will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 18. For example, when a “pseudo continuous design” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle decorative design 501B on the activated line for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, all the decorative patterns 501 are restarted by the pseudo continuous production (for example, see FIGS. 18C to 18E). The pseudo-sequence symbol is a special symbol (decorative symbol that is not used during normal fluctuation display) that suggests the execution of the pseudo-sequence effect, and is a symbol that is not temporarily stopped on the effective line of the small symbol 502. It should be noted that the small symbol 502 continues to fluctuate and display at high speed during the pseudo continuous production.

  The timing at which the pseudo continuous production is performed is before reaching reach, during normal reach, and during SP reach. For this reason, the pseudo continuous production is not executed during the stop display of the special symbol, during the full rotation reach, or after the hit notification. Note that a pseudo continuous production may be executed during the SPSP reach.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability when the pseudo continuous effect is executed is higher than the reliability when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed (for example, the reliability is 0.1%). In addition, the reliability is set in advance so that the greater the number of pseudo continuous effects performed during one change display of the special symbol (up to three times), the higher the reliability becomes. The number of pseudo consecutive effects is uniquely determined according to the variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 9D). For example, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the losing variation pattern H0, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed at all. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the losing variation pattern H6, the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the big hit variation pattern A11, the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment illustrated in FIG. 9D, if the pseudo continuous production is executed once (for example, the reliability is 3%), it may not develop into a reach production having a reliability higher than the SP reach. . In addition, when the pseudo continuous production is performed twice (for example, the reliability is 15%), it always develops into the reach production having the reliability of SP reach or more. Also, the pseudo continuous production is controlled to be executable three times only at the time of the big hit, and when the pseudo continuous production is executed three times, it always develops to the full rotation reach (see FIG. 13 (w)).

  In the pseudo continuous production, an effect image of a color corresponding to the number of executions is displayed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in emission colors corresponding to the number of executions. The color corresponding to the first pseudo continuous production is green, the color corresponding to the second pseudo continuous production is red, and the color corresponding to the third pseudo continuous production is rainbow. For example, with the execution of the first pseudo continuous production, a green effect image is displayed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit green light. As the second pseudo continuous production is executed, the green effect image is erased and the red effect image is displayed. Accordingly, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit red light. With the execution of the third pseudo continuous production, the red effect image is erased, and the rainbow effect image is displayed. Along with this, the dramatic effect 7 arranged at the initial position, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow colors. In the present embodiment, the full rotation reach is started as a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decoration symbol 501 is restarted by the execution of the third pseudo continuous effect. The rainbow effect image according to the third pseudo continuous production is deleted at the start of the full rotation reach. Then, another rainbow effect image is displayed with the start of the full rotation reach. The emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the third pseudo continuous production ends at the start of the full rotation reach. Be started. Therefore, the light emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the third pseudo continuous production and the light emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the full rotation reach are always continuous. This makes it possible to provide continuity between the third pseudo continuous production and the full revolution reach.

  After a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) elapses after the emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the third pseudo continuous production is started, the emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the full rotation reach is started. May be. For example, after the emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the third pseudo continuous production ends, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are turned off, and then the rainbow color accompanying the start of the full-rotation reach. May be started. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the third pseudo continuous production ends and the full rotation reach is started.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18 (A), the fluctuation effect starts with the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the decoration symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 start the fluctuation display. Specifically, the decorative symbol 501 is displayed in a variably manner such that one symbol to nine symbols scroll vertically from top to bottom at high speed in each of three columns (left column, middle column, and right column). You. In addition, the small symbols 502 are also variably displayed in three rows (left row, middle row, and right row) such that 1 to 9 symbols are scrolled vertically from top to bottom at a high speed. In the present embodiment, the small symbol 502 is variably displayed basically in the same variable display mode as the decorative symbol 501 (that is, in the variable display mode in which scrolling is performed from top to bottom at the same speed as the decorative symbol 501). In the example shown in FIG. 18A, a small character indicating low reliability is displayed by executing the mini-character effect at the start of the variable effect.

  Note that the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 may be variably displayed in different directions. For example, the decorative symbol 501 is variably displayed so as to horizontally scroll from right to left, whereas the small symbol 502 is displayed in an upward direction. The display may be changed so as to scroll vertically downward from.

  In the present embodiment, unless otherwise specified, the light emission control of the frame member 3 and the like is performed in the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission during the fluctuation effect, so that the frame member 3 does not emit light in a rainbow color. In the present embodiment, the effect button 26 (specifically, the button lamp 262) is suppressed from emitting light during periods other than during the button effect and during the hit operation effect, and is turned off.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18 (B), the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol 501C are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, reach is established, and normal reach is started. In the present embodiment, an odd symbol arrangement in which the same three odd symbols are aligned means a probability change, whereas an even symbol arrangement in which the same three even symbols are aligned is likely to be a reduction in time (FIG. 9B). reference). For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 18 (B), if the reach symbol is an even number, it is suggested that a large hit is likely to be a time saving hit. On the other hand, if the reach symbol is an odd number, it means that if the hit is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is a probability variable hit.

  Thereafter, a button effect is started during the normal reach (see FIG. 18B). This button effect is the weak button effect described with reference to FIG. Along with the start of the weak button effect, a button image 51 simulating the effect button 26 in a normal state, a gauge image 52, and characters of an operation instruction are displayed. When these images are deleted in response to the operation during the weak button effect, a pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the decorative symbol 501 as the middle decorative symbol 501B (see FIG. 18C). Then, the pseudo consecutive production is executed, and the pseudo second consecutive fluctuation display for restarting the decorative symbol 501 at a high speed is started (see FIG. 18D).

  The pseudo continuous production is a production that can be executed regardless of whether or not the button production is performed. However, when the pseudo continuous production is executed with the weak button production as an opportunity, the reliability is higher than when the pseudo continuous production is performed without the intervention of the button production. Further, when the pseudo continuous production is executed with the strong button production as an execution trigger, it is determined that the pseudo continuous production is executed two or more times. In other words, the button effect is used as a chance to increase the reliability of the pseudo continuous effect. Note that a button effect of an effect mode different from the button effect executed at the end of the SPSP reach 1 may be executed. For example, a button effect of an effect mode in which characters of the operation instruction are not displayed may be executed. Further, the pseudo continuous production does not necessarily have to be executed following the button production, and another notice production may be executed. For example, in response to an operation during the button effect, a notice effect that indicates that the character is highly reliable may be executed by a large number of characters crossing the screen.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18 (D), the number of executions of the pseudo continuous production (the number of executions of the restart) is a character displayed at the start of the pseudo continuous production (for example, being a pseudo second production (ie, the first pseudo production). Is restarted), a green letter “× 2” indicating the restart is issued. Also, with the start of the second pseudo sequence, a green effect image is displayed along the inside of the periphery of the screen, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C remain green for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Light emission is controlled. For example, the green effect image is displayed continuously even after the end of the green light emission control. In the example of FIG. 18, since the second pseudo consecutive effect is performed in the pseudo second consecutive variation display, the green effect image is displayed until the pseudo third consecutive variation display is started. After the end of the emission control in green, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C resume emission corresponding to normal reach.

  It should be noted that after reaching is established in the pseudo-second variation display, SP reaching may occur (see FIG. 9D). In this case, after the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle decorative pattern 501B becomes slower, and develops into the SP reach through the “transition effect”. The “transition effect” is an effect indicating that the reach effect develops (see FIG. 19A). In such a case, the green effect image is erased with the start of the transition effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18 (E), after the reach is established in the fluctuation display of the second pseudo sequence, the button effect is started (see FIG. 18 (E)). This button effect is a weak button effect like the first button effect. When the button effect ends in response to the operation during the weak button effect, the pseudo-sequence symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second pseudo-sequence in the same manner as when the first pseudo-sequence effect was executed (FIG. 18 (F )reference). As a result, the second pseudo consecutive production is executed, and the pseudo third consecutive fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 18 (G)). For example, at the start of the third pseudo sequence, the green effect image is deleted, and the red character “x3” indicating the number of times the pseudo consecutive production is performed, and the red effect image along the inner edge of the screen edge Is displayed. At the same time, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in red for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, with the start of the variable display of the third pseudo sequence, the red-light emitting effect component 7 returns to the initial position after operating for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Note that, with the start of the variable display of the second pseudo sequence, the direct-acting character 7 emitting green light may be operated in the same manner. The red effect image is displayed continuously even after the end of the red light emission control. In the example of FIG. 18, since the transition effect is executed, the red effect image is displayed until the start of the transition effect. After the end of the emission control in red, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C resume emission corresponding to normal reach.

  As illustrated in FIG. 18H, when the reach is established in the pseudo third consecutive change display and the scroll speed of the middle decorative pattern 501 </ b> B becomes slower, the player can recognize that it is the end of the normal reach. (See FIG. 18 (I)). In the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous production is executed twice, the transition to the SP reach illustrated in FIG. 19B or the SPSP reach illustrated in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 19A, the red effect image is deleted with the start of the transition effect. In the transition effect, for example, the middle decoration pattern 501B that has been scrolling slowly is scrolled at high speed. Along with this, for example, the left decorative symbol 501A constituting the reach symbol moves diagonally to the upper left and moves to temporarily stop at the left corner of the screen, and the right decorative symbol 501C constituting the reach symbol decreases to the upper right. An effect display in which the user moves while moving and temporarily stops at the right corner of the screen is performed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 19 (B), when SP reach is developed, after a title image 503 indicating the title of SP reach, "If a character E can be found, is a big hit ?!" is displayed, then the character in the SP reach is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 19C). These images are effect images that indicate the degree of reliability based on the color of the characters. In the present embodiment, the frame member 3 and the like are controlled to emit light in response to the variation effect in accordance with the display of these images.

  The player can monitor the progress of the production while estimating the reliability based on the colors of the title image 503 and the subtitle image 504, the fact that the target character searched by the own character is the character E (see FIG. 19B), and the like. It is. In the example of FIG. 19C, a dinosaur indicating that the degree of reliability is high is displayed by performing the mini-character effect during the SP reach.

  In the case of a fluctuation effect corresponding to another jackpot fluctuation pattern A3 different from the jackpot fluctuation pattern A11 corresponding to the current fluctuation effect (see FIG. 9 (D)), as shown in FIG. At the end of the reach, the own character finds the target character E, and a hit action effect shown in FIG. 13 (l) is executed to notify a hit (FIGS. 19 (I) and (J)). When the big hit is notified in the SP reach, the flow of the effect after the hit operation effect is the same as the case where the big hit is notified in the SPSP reach 1.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the premier cut-in and premier button effects are effects executed in SPSP Reach 1. For this reason, in the variable production that ends without evolving from SP reach to SPSP reach 1, the premium cut-in and the premium button production cannot be executed, and even if it is a big hit, the board lamps 25A and 25B will be connected only after the hit operation production. Light emission of the frame lamps 37A to 37C is not controlled in rainbow colors. In such a fluctuation effect, the opportunity to make the frame lamp 37 and the like emit light in rainbow color is smaller than that in the fluctuation effect of executing the premium cut-in and the premium button effect, and the frame lamp 37 and the like are rainbow color before the hit operation effect. The continuity obtained by emitting light a plurality of times cannot be obtained. Further, when the notice effect is performed at a plurality of timings (for example, the pseudo consecutive effect according to the second pseudo pseudo sequence and the pseudo consecutive effect according to the third pseudo pseudo sequence (see FIG. 18)), the light emission control corresponding to each preview effect is performed. As a result, the entire gaming machine emits light in different colors, which may complicate the effect, and may not be associated with each of the notice effects.

  On the other hand, for example, in the variable effect in which the premium cut-in and the premium button effect are executed, the emission of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is controlled in a rainbow color even before the hit operation effect. The frame lamp 37 and the like can be caused to emit light in rainbow colors a plurality of times before the hit operation effect. Thereby, it is possible to give relevance and continuity to different announcement effects, and to give a sense of unity as the whole variable effect.

  If the subject character cannot find the target character E at the end of the SP reach, as shown in FIGS. 19 (D) and (E), the middle decorative pattern 501B is temporarily stopped, and the reach loss eye is temporarily stopped and lost. Notification is performed. Since the fluctuation effect this time corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation pattern A11, the decorative pattern 501 and the small pattern 502 are not stopped and displayed by this loss notification, and develop into SPSP reach 1 via the transition effect ( FIG. 19 (F)).

  In the case of a variation effect corresponding to another variation pattern, after the decoration symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are stopped and displayed as they are without changing the combination of the decoration symbols 501. Loss notification may be performed (loss variation pattern H3, see FIG. 19G). Further, after the decorative symbol 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may evolve into the SPSP reach 2 via the transition effect (the jackpot variation pattern A10 or A12, the loss variation pattern H10 or H11, see FIG. 19F). . Note that, for example, there may be a resurrection hit pattern in which a hit action effect and a hit notification (see FIGS. 19 (I) and (J)) are performed after the loss notification at the end of SP reach.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20 (A), in the present variation effect, the SPSP reach 1 in which the player's character and the enemy F fight through a transition effect different from the above (or the same transition effect).

  In the present embodiment, unlike during the transition effect that evolves to SP reach (see FIG. 19A), during the transition effect that evolves to SPSP reach, the screen configuration for emphasizing SPSP reach 1 is as follows. Is changed to Specifically, for example, the hold icon 54 and the hold stage 540 that have been displayed before the start of SPSP Reach 1 (for example, at the start of the fluctuation effect: see FIG. 18A) are hidden at the start of the battle (for example, FIG. 20 (A)). These effect images are displayed again immediately before the decorative pattern 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, two seconds before) (see FIG. 12A).

  In this embodiment, the reach symbol is basically temporarily displayed at the top of the screen during the battle (during SPSP Reach 1), except during a period in which a button effect (see FIG. 13 (k)) described later is executed. (See FIGS. 20A to 20E).

  After shifting to the own character advantageous route in the push-in effect illustrated in FIG. 20 (B), a notice effect informing of the jackpot is executed for the first time in the present fluctuation effect (see FIG. 20 (C)). Specifically, as a mini-character effect, a premier character F indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed as a part of the background image during the battle. In the present embodiment, even if the premiere character F is displayed in the mini-character effect, the light emission control in the variable effect light emission according to the SPSP reach 1 is continued, so that the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are hit with the display. Light emission is not controlled with a rainbow color indicating that it is determined. This makes it possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed without distracting the player during the battle without distraction. However, a player who does not know what character is does not know that the jackpot is confirmed. Thereby, it can be suggested to only some players that the jackpot is definitely determined.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20 (D), a premier cut-in is executed as a notice effect for notifying the second big hit in the present fluctuation effect. In the premier cut-in, a premier cut-in sound is output from the speaker 24 when the display of the premier cut-in image 58 including the rainbow starts, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit rainbow colors. Controlled. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the big hit is determined as compared with the case where the mini-character effect displaying the premium character F is executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20 (E), after the end of the premier cut-in, the light emission control of the frame member 3 and the like is again performed by the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission related to the SPPS reach 1, so that no light emission is performed in rainbow colors.

  Thereafter, a button suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 20 (F)). In the button suggestion effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 fades out to white. In the button suggestion effect, for example, a white effect image indicating that the button image 51 is displayed is superimposed and displayed on the near side of the effect image related to the SPSP reach 1 indicating that the battle is in progress. . The effect image includes, for example, a white effect image representing a frame portion of the button image 51 and a white effect image representing a locus of arc-shaped light. The display of the effect image suggests, for example, the position where the button image 51 is displayed and the shape of the displayed button image 51 (and the shape of the effect button 26).

  In this embodiment, the screen configuration is changed as follows at the start of the button suggestion effect to emphasize the button effect. For example, the left decorative symbol 501A (reach symbol) displayed in the upper left corner of the screen and the right decorative symbol 501C (reach symbol) displayed in the upper right corner of the screen are hidden, and the icon 53 is hidden. You. The reach symbol is displayed again with the start of a victory effect (see FIG. 21C) described later. Further, the icon 53 is displayed again immediately before the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed (for example, two seconds before) (see FIG. 12A). Then, the icon 53 is deleted with the stop display of the decorative pattern 501 (see FIG. 12B).

  In the present embodiment, light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is performed so that the game board 2 and the frame member 3 appear to blink white at regular intervals from the start of the button suggestion effect. . In the button suggestion effect, a white effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the light emission of the various lamps is controlled so that the frame member 3 and the like appear white. Thereby, the player can recognize that the button effect will be started soon.

  In addition, as a button suggestion effect that notifies that the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C may blink in a rainbow color at a constant interval from the start of the button suggestion effect.

  When the premium button effect illustrated in FIG. 21A is started following the button suggestive effect illustrated in FIG. 20F, the display of the button image 51 and the like with the rainbow effect image is started and fixed. A sound is output. Accordingly, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the effect button 26 (button lamp 262) are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color by the light emission pattern for the premier button effect. For this reason, the player can easily recognize that the big hit has been confirmed before operating the effect button 26.

  The hit operation effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the premier button effect (or in response to the end timing of a predetermined valid period). As a result, the rainbow effect image or the like according to the premium button effect illustrated in FIG. 21A is deleted, and the rainbow effect image according to the hit operation effect illustrated in FIG. 21B (in the present embodiment, An image (coloring the surroundings of the stage 7) is displayed. In addition, from the start of the hit operation effect, the hit operation effect sound is output from the speaker 24, and the illuminating control in the rainbow color from the start of the premier button effect is performed, and then the panel lamp 25A and the light emitting pattern for the hit operation effect are produced. 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the effect button 26 are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color. In addition to this, in the hit action effect, the staging part 7 is operated in the lower left direction while the rainbow light emission is controlled.

  When the victory effect illustrated in FIG. 21C is started, the rainbow control for the effect button 26 (button lamp 262) and the effect character 7 is finished, while the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame are set. Light emission control of the lamps 37A to 37C in rainbow colors is continued. In addition, the rainbow effect image related to the hit operation effect is deleted, and from the start of the victory effect, an effect image in which the character defeats the enemy and informs of the victory is displayed, or the middle decoration pattern 501B is displayed as the reach pattern. The same four symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a hit notification based on the even symbol arrangement is performed. Further, with the temporary stop of the middle decorative symbol 501B, the small symbol 502 scrolled at high speed is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 501 in the form of four symbols. Thereafter, even if the decorative pattern 501 is temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line at the center of the screen as illustrated in FIG. 21D, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are rainbow colors following the winning effect. Light emission is controlled.

  When the re-fluctuation effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (E) is started, the fluctuating display is started again slowly while the decorative symbols 501 are synchronized in a pattern-aligned manner, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are displayed. And the emission control in white is started.

  When the successful effect illustrated in FIG. 21 (F) is executed, for example, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are temporarily stopped in seven symbols and then stopped and displayed (see FIG. 21 (G)). From the start of the successful effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as illustrated in FIGS. 21 (H) and (I), the jackpot game according to the 6R probability change is performed while the rainbow control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is continued. The display of an effect image related to the opening effect notifying that the start has been started and the effect image for prompting right-handing (for example, characters of “>> right-handed”) are started to be displayed.

  Note that the effect image (the character image of “RUSH BONUS”) illustrated in FIG. 21 (I) is changed to the first special symbol by executing up to the flow of the effect illustrated in FIG. It may be displayed during the display. For example, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are not stopped and displayed at the timing illustrated in FIG. Then, for example, while the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed with seven symbols aligned, the decorative symbols 501 are not displayed without being stopped and displayed, and the display of the effect image illustrated in FIG. 21H is started. Then, together with the display of the effect image illustrated in FIG. 21 (I), the small symbols 502 are stopped and displayed in seven symbols. Thereby, the type of the jackpot can be notified by using almost the entire area of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the pattern of the symbol arrangement finally stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the first special symbol 502 is displayed in the small symbol 502. Can be indicated by

  Further, the timing at which the small symbols 502 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a symbol-aligned manner is not limited to the timing described above, and may be any timing. For example, the small symbol 502 is continuously displayed at the high speed from the start of the variable effect, and the timing of the start of the winning operation, the start of the victory effect, and the timing immediately before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, at the start of the successful effect or at the end of the period) ) May be temporarily stopped and displayed in a symbol-aligned manner from any of the timings described in (1) and (2). This makes it possible to control the small symbol 502 in accordance with the mode of the decorative pattern 501, the state of the variable effect including the reach effect, etc., the light-emitting mode of the board lamp 25, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 37, and the like. It is possible to spread.

[Specific example of floating production without executing the premium cut-in / premier button production]
With reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, at the start of the variable production, execution of a cut-in production other than the premium cut-in (for example, strong cut-in) is determined, and a button production other than the premium button production (for example, the strong button) is performed. A specific example of the variable effect when the execution is determined will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example until the button suggestion effect is executed via the strong cut-in after the SPSP reach 1 is developed (until immediately before the start of the button effect in SPSP reach 1). FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example from the start of the strong button effect in SPSP reach 1 to the notification of a hit at the end of SPSP reach 1.

  The fluctuation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 22 and 23 are different from those of FIGS. 20 and 21 which are specific examples of one of the flows illustrated in FIG. 13, and are different from the specific examples of the three flows illustrated in FIG. Including examples. Specifically, as in FIGS. 20 and 21, the process proceeds in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), and (n). Specific examples of the direct hit pattern and the revival proceeding in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (o), (l), (m), and (n) A specific example of a hit pattern and a specific example of a loss pattern that proceeds in the order of FIGS. 13 (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (o), and (p) are shown. . 13 (a), (b), (c) and (d) until the start of SPSP reach 1 (FIGS. 13 (e) and 13 (f)), as in the specific examples of FIGS. , (S), and (v), the variable effect proceeds in this order.

  The fluctuation effect according to the above-mentioned direct hit pattern can be executed corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9 (D)) of the first special symbol, as in FIGS. 17, 20, and 21. In addition, the fluctuation effect according to the resurrection hit pattern can be executed in accordance with the large hit fluctuation pattern A13 of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation effect according to the loss pattern can be executed in correspondence with the loss fluctuation pattern H11 in the first special symbol. (See FIG. 9D).

  For example, if the SPSP reach 1 illustrated in FIG. 22A is developed following the flow of the variable effects illustrated in FIGS. 18A to 18 and FIGS. 19A to 19F, the jackpot is determined. Since the notice effect has not been executed even once, the player does not know whether it is a big hit or not. Under such a situation, after the pressing effect similar to the pressing effect illustrated in FIG. 20 (B) is executed, unlike the case of FIG. 20 (C), the mini character effect in which the premium character F is displayed is not executed. The battle proceeds (see FIGS. 22B and 22C).

  When the strong cut-in according to FIG. 22D is started, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in red with the start of the display of the strong cut-in image 57. The player can recognize that the reliability is relatively high, but does not know whether it is a big hit or not.

  As illustrated in FIG. 22 (E), after the strong cut-in, the light emission control of the frame member 3 and the like is performed again with a color other than the rainbow color in the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission according to the SPSP reach 1. Then, after the button suggestion effect similar to that of FIG. 20F is started (see FIG. 22F), the strong button effect illustrated in FIG. 23A is started. From the start of the strong button effect, the button image 51 without the rainbow effect image and the like are displayed, and the operation instruction sound is output from the speaker 24. Accordingly, the emission button 26 (button lamp 262) is controlled to emit red light by the light emission pattern for the strong button effect, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are turned off.

  In the direct hit pattern, a big hit is notified in the same flow as in FIGS. 21B to 21F (see FIGS. 23B to 23F). In the resurrection hit pattern, the loss suggestion illustrated in FIG. 23 (G) is executed, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C blink blue. Subsequently, the middle decorative symbol 501B is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the reach symbol, and a loss is notified by a reach-losing eye (FIG. 23 (H)). Accordingly, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are turned off. However, in this losing notification, the hit design effect illustrated in FIG. 23B is executed without the decorative symbol 501 being stopped and displayed. After the hit action effect, the big hit is notified in the same flow as in FIGS. 21 (B) to (F).

  Further, in the losing pattern, losing notification is performed based on the reach losing order following the losing suggestion (FIG. 23 (G) → (H)). Then, the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed in the same manner without change, and the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed accordingly (see FIGS. 23 (G) to (I)). Accordingly, the icon 53 is deleted, and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit white light.

  In this way, in the variable production in which the premium cut-in and the premium button production are not performed as illustrated in FIGS. 22 and 23, even if the big hit is achieved, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to only after the hit operation production. C is rainbow color and light emission is not controlled. Such a variable effect is less likely to cause the various lamps to emit light in rainbow colors compared to the variable effect of executing a premium cut-in and a premium button effect. The continuity obtained by emitting light cannot be obtained. In addition, since the player cannot recognize that the jackpot is a big hit, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the big hit with respect to the variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the variable effect in which the premium cut-in and the premium button effect as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21 are executed, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color a plurality of times. Is done. As a result, it is possible to provide continuity to the entire variable effect, and it is possible to realize an effect that makes it easy for the player to recognize that a large hit has occurred.

[Modification of Premier Cut-In Production]
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modification of the premium cut-in. The display time of the premier cut-in image 58, the output time of the premier cut-in sound, and the time of the rainbow control of the frame member 3 and the like at the start of the premier cut-in may have the following relationship.

  In the following description related to FIG. 24, the premier cut-in image 58 is set to “rainbow image”, the premier cut-in sound is set to “sound”, and the emission control of the rainbow color of the frame member 3 and the like at the start of the premier cut-in is performed. They may be called "rainbow emission".

FIG. 24 (A-1): Rainbow image display time = rainbow emission time <sound output time / rainbow image display start timing, rainbow emission start timing, and sound output start timing are all when the premium cut-in starts.
The rainbow image display end timing and the rainbow emission end timing are the same, and the sound output end timing comes after that (for example, one second later).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24A-1, for example, even if the rainbow image display time and the rainbow emission time end in a relatively short time (for example, 0.8 seconds), the sound output time continues thereafter. . As a result, even when the rainbow image display time and the rainbow emission time end, the fact that the premium cut-in sound is output is recognized, so that the premium cut-in is executed (that is, the jackpot is determined). Can be grasped by the player.

FIG. 24 (A-2): Rainbow emission time <rainbow image display time <sound output time / rainbow image display start timing, rainbow emission start timing, and sound output start timing are all at the time of starting the premium cut-in.
The rainbow image display end timing comes after the rainbow emission end timing (for example, less than 0.8 seconds), and the sound output end timing comes after that (for example, one second).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (A-2), for example, by setting the rainbow emission time relatively short in advance (for example, less than 0.8 seconds from the start of the premier cut-in), immediately after the start of the premier cut-in, It is possible to end the rainbow light emission control relating to the premier cut-in. For this reason, the frame member 3 and the like perform light emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the premier cut-in, and immediately after that, other effect images displayed together with the rainbow image on the liquid crystal screen 5 (for example, in the example of FIG. It is possible to perform light emission control with a fluctuation effect corresponding light emission corresponding to a battle effect image). Even with such a configuration, with the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24A-2, the rainbow image display time and the sound output time continue even after the rainbow emission time ends. Thus, the player can recognize that the premier cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premier cut-in image 58 or the premier cut-in sound even after the rainbow light emission time ends.

FIG. 24 (B-1): Rainbow emission time <rainbow image display time <sound output time / rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the time of starting the premium cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing comes after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, 0.3 seconds).
The rainbow image display end timing and the rainbow emission end timing are the same, and the sound output end timing comes after that (for example, one second later).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (B-1), for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player has noticed that the premium cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premium cut-in image 58 and the premium cut-in sound. It is possible to arrive. By setting the rainbow light emission time relatively short in advance (for example, 0.5 seconds), the rainbow light emission control relating to the premier cut-in can be immediately terminated, and the light emission control in the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission can be restarted, for example. Even in such a configuration, if the relationship illustrated in FIG. 24 (A-2) is used, the sound output time continues after the rainbow emission time ends, so that the jackpot is determined with the finish of the premium cut-in remaining. Other effects (for example, continuation of SPSP Reach 1) can be performed while suggesting that there is something.

FIG. 24 (B-2): Rainbow image display time <sound output time <rainbow emission time / rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the start of the premium cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing comes after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, less than 0.8 seconds).
The sound output end timing comes after the rainbow image display end timing (for example, one second), and the rainbow emission end timing comes after that (for example, less than one second).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24B-2, for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player has noticed that the premium cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premium cut-in image 58 and the premium cut-in sound. It is possible to arrive. Since the rainbow emission time continues even after the rainbow image display time and the sound output time end, for example, even if an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP Reach 1) is executed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like, the premier It is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed by leaving the lingering cut-in.

FIG. 24 (B-3): Rainbow emission time <rainbow image display time = sound output time / rainbow image display start timing and sound output start timing are at the time of starting the premium cut-in. The rainbow emission start timing comes after the rainbow image display start timing (for example, less than 0.5 seconds).
After the rainbow emission end timing (for example, less than 0.5 seconds), the rainbow image display end timing and the sound output end timing arrive at the same time.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (B-3), for example, the rainbow emission start timing is set after the player has noticed that the premium cut-in has been executed by recognizing the premium cut-in image 58 and the premium cut-in sound. It is possible to arrive. By setting the rainbow light emission time relatively short in advance (for example, 0.5 seconds), the rainbow light emission control relating to the premier cut-in can be immediately terminated, and the light emission control in the fluctuation effect corresponding light emission can be restarted, for example.

FIG. 24 (C-1): Rainbow image display time <sound output time <rainbow light emission time / rainbow light emission start timing is the time when the premium cut-in starts. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, after 1.2 seconds), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
The sound output end timing comes after the rainbow emission end timing and the rainbow image display end timing come simultaneously (for example, 1 second).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-1), for example, after it is recognized that the jackpot is determined by rainbow emission and that some effect to notify the jackpot determination is started, the premium cut-in image 58 is displayed. It is also possible to output a premier cut-in sound. The output of the premier cut-in sound continues even after the rainbow image display time and the sound output time have ended. For example, an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP reach 1) is performed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like. It is also possible to suggest that the jackpot is fixed, leaving the finish of the premium cut-in.

FIG. 24 (C-2): Rainbow image display time <sound output time <rainbow light emission time / rainbow light emission start timing is the time when the premium cut-in starts. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, after 0.1 seconds), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
The sound output end timing comes after the rainbow image display end timing (for example, one second), and the rainbow emission end timing comes after that (for example, less than 0.1 second).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-2), for example, after it is recognized that the jackpot is determined by rainbow emission and that some effect to notify the jackpot determination is started, the premium cut-in image 58 is displayed. It is also possible to output a premier cut-in sound. Since the rainbow emission time continues even after the rainbow image display time and the sound output time end, for example, even if an effect other than the premier cut-in (for example, continuation of SPSP Reach 1) is executed using the liquid crystal screen 5 or the like, the premier It is possible to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed by leaving the lingering cut-in.

FIG. 24 (C-3): Rainbow image display time = rainbow light emission time <sound output time / rainbow light emission start timing is at the start of the premium cut-in. After the rainbow emission start timing (for example, 0.8 seconds), the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing arrive at the same time.
The rainbow image display end timing comes after the rainbow emission end timing (for example, 0.8 seconds), and the sound output end timing comes after (for example, one second).

  In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 (C-3), for example, after it is recognized that the jackpot is determined by rainbow light emission and some effect to notify the jackpot determination is started, the premium cut-in image 58 is displayed. It is also possible to output a premier cut-in sound. For example, from the start of the display of the premier cut-in image 58, the variation effect corresponding light emission corresponding to another effect image displayed with the premier cut-in image 58 (for example, an effect image relating to a battle in the example of FIG. 20D). Since the light emission control can be resumed, it is possible to display the premier cut-in image 58 while suppressing a decrease in the interest of the effect (for example, SPSP reach 1 in the example of FIG. 20D) related to the other effect image. It is possible.

  In all the configurations illustrated in FIG. 24, the rainbow image display start timing and the sound output start timing are the same, but for example, the sound output start timing may come after the rainbow image display start timing comes, or the rainbow image The sound output start timing may come before the display start timing.

  The sound output time of the premier cut-in sound is not limited to 1.8 seconds, but may be any number of seconds. For example, the sound output time of the premium cut-in sound may be shorter (or longer) than the display time of the premium cut-in image 58, or may be shorter (or longer) than the rainbow emission time of the frame member 3 or the like. .

For example, in the premier cut-in, sound output time <rainbow image display time <rainbow emission time relationship, sound output time <rainbow image display time = rainbow emission time relationship, or sound output time <rainbow emission time <rainbow image display The case where the time relationship is established will be described below.
For example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing and the sound output end timing is earlier than the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing (for example, one second before), the player's attention is drawn by outputting the premier cut-in sound. , It is possible to display the premier cut-in image 58 and start rainbow emission.
For example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is earlier than the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing, and the sound output end timing is during the rainbow image display and the rainbow emission, the premier cut-in sound is output. It is possible to display the premier cut-in image 58 and start the rainbow light emission from the time of attracting the player's attention, and it is possible to smooth the flow of the effect.
Also, for example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is the same as the rainbow image display start timing and the rainbow emission start timing, and the sound output end timing is during the rainbow image display and the rainbow emission, if the premiere cut-in is started, It is possible to have
For example, if the arrival of the sound output start timing is during the display of the rainbow image and the emission of the rainbow, and the end of the sound output is the end timing of the rainbow image display or the end of the rainbow emission, the end of the premier cut-in operation is repeated. , And as a result, it is possible to make the premium cut-in a powerful effect.
For example, if the sound output end timing is after the rainbow image display end timing or after the rainbow emission end timing, the premier cut-in image 58 and the premier cut-in are executed for the player who did not notice the rainbow emission. Can be recognized.

  Further, the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is not limited to the above-described one, and may be any number of seconds, for example, five seconds or until another effect start (for example, a button effect start).

  In addition, the time of the emission control in the rainbow color at the start of the premier cut-in is not limited to the above, and may be any number of seconds, for example, 10 seconds. Further, the emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the premier cut-in may be continued until another effect is started (for example, until a hit operation effect is started).

  The change in the example of FIG. 24 and the above-described mode of the premier cut-in can be applied to the premier button effect. Specifically, the start time of the premier cut-in is read as “the start of the premium button effect (and the start of the valid period)”, and the display time of the premier cut-in image 58 is read as “the valid period”. In addition, the premier cut-in image 58 is read as "button image 51 relating to the premier button effect", the premier cut-in sound is read as "determined sound pertaining to the premier button effect", and the rainbow of the frame member 3 and the like accompanying the start of the premier cut-in. The light emission control in color is read as "light emission control in rainbow color accompanying the start of the premier button effect."

[Modification of cut-in effect]
A modified example of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modification in which a premium cut-in image 58 is superimposed and displayed on another cut-in image.

  The configuration described with reference to FIG. 25 is a configuration in which, after a cut-in image is displayed, another cut-in image having higher reliability than the cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the near side.

  Specifically, for example, during SPSP Reach 1 (during a battle between the character and the enemy: see, for example, FIG. 20), a weak cut-in, a medium cut-in, or a strong cut-in is executed, and cuts related to each cut-in are performed. The in-image (see FIG. 14) is displayed (see FIGS. 25A to 25C). Immediately thereafter (for example, after 0.5 seconds), the premium cut-in is displayed superimposed on the front side of the displayed cut-in image (see FIG. 25D).

  After the cut-in effect, any one of the characters A to C related to the cut-in image displayed first participates in the battle between the character and the enemy. Thereby, it is possible to suggest both the type of the character and the fact that the jackpot is determined.

  Each character related to the cut-in image may appear in the SPSP reach 1 before the start of the cut-in effect. Further, the character related to the cut-in image does not have to appear in SPSP reach 1.

  The production means for emitting light in relation to the cut-in effect is not limited to the above-described one, and the other emission means capable of emitting light may be controlled to emit light during the production. For example, light emission control may be performed such that the directing object 7 that is not operating during the premier cut-in emits light in a rainbow color, or the starting port lamp 38 may emit light in a rainbow color.

[Modification of button production]
In addition, according to the operation during the button effect, the effect images other than the small design 502, the blue character indicating the number of special 1 hold, and the red character indicating the number of special 2 hold are hidden from the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp is displayed. The 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 may be temporarily turned off. In this case, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262 is started in a rainbow color with the start of the operation effect after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). May be.

  In the case where the above configuration is employed, for example, the effect proceeds in the following two flows according to the operation during the effect of the premium button effect. Specifically, for example, when the emission control in rainbow colors related to the above-mentioned effect means is continuous over the execution time of the premium button effect and the hit operation effect, and the start of the hit operation effect after the temporary end without discontinuing Accordingly, the emission control in the rainbow color may be started again. As a result, it is possible to change the mode at the start of the winning action effect, and it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, by temporarily terminating the rainbow color emission, the relationship of the rainbow color emission time related to the premier button effect <the rainbow color emission time after the end of the premier button effect can be satisfied. It is possible to make it stand out more.

  Note that, before the end of the validity period, the emission control in the rainbow color accompanying the start of the premier button effect may be ended. Specifically, for example, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C may be illuminated in rainbow colors for a period (for example, one second) shorter than the effective period from the start of the premier button effect. Regarding the effect button 26 (the button lamp 262), it is sufficient that the light emission in any one of the white and red light emission colors continues even after the light emission control in the rainbow color ends until the effective period ends. For example, the button lamp 262 is controlled to emit light in a rainbow color so as to synchronize with the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C for a predetermined period (for example, one second) from the start of the premier button effect. After the light emission control ends, the light emission may be controlled to a color other than the rainbow color (for example, red) until the end of the effective period.

  According to the above-described configuration, for the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C, the relationship of "rainbow emission time associated with the premium cut-in> rainbow emission time associated with the premium button effect" is established. This makes it possible to make the first rainbow light emission more impressive than the second rainbow light emission. Further, according to the above configuration, for the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C, the relationship of iridescent emission time associated with the premier cut-in = iridescent emission time associated with the premier button effect is established. This makes it possible to make the emission time of the first and second rainbow colors the same, and to make more common items between the Premier Cut-in and the Premier Button production, so that it is possible to make the two productions more relevant. It is.

  In addition, as another variation of the button effect described above, a button effect indicating that it is determined to be a probability change hit (that is, the big hit symbol indicating the 6R probability change is always stopped and displayed) may be executed. Specifically, for example, a premium button effect (see FIGS. 16C and 16E) may be executed at a timing immediately after the end of the winning operation effect. When the effect button 26 is operated during the premier button effect, a successful effect is always executed regardless of the type of the reach symbol in accordance with the operation, and a hit notification may be performed by odd-numbered symbol alignment. .

  The effect means for emitting light for the button effect is not limited to the one described above, and light emitting control of another effect means capable of emitting light may be performed during the effect. For example, a light emission control may be performed such that the non-operating (or operating) presentation character 7 appears to emit rainbow light during the premier button effect, or the starting port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow color. You may let it.

[Variation of Light Emission Control for Hitting Action Effect, Victory Effect, Hit Notification, and Successful Effect]
The effect means for emitting light in connection with the hit operation effect, the victory effect, the hit notification, and the successful effect is not limited to the above-described one, and other light emitting effect means may be controlled to emit light during the effect. For example, during the hit notification, during the successful production, and during the victory production, it may be possible to perform a light emission control so that the non-operating production character 7 appears to emit light in a rainbow color. May emit light.

  It is not necessary to start the light emission control in the rainbow color from the start of the successful effect and the winning effect. For example, the start of each effect after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each effect. May start emitting light in the rainbow color. Even with such a configuration, by setting the timing at which the rainbow effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the start of each effect, the display time of the rainbow effect image <the rainbow light emission for each effect The time relationship will hold. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and then cause the entire gaming machine to emit rainbow light.

  Note that, during the execution of the victory effect, the hit notification, and the successful effect, light emission control may be performed in a color other than the rainbow color (for example, yellow). As a result, while the premier cut-in, the premier button effect, and the hit operation effect are being performed, it is possible to control the light emission in the rainbow color while the other effects are being performed. It is possible to realize a striking and impressive production.

[Other Modifications]
In the present embodiment, for example, in order to enhance a feeling of excitement with respect to the jackpot, a configuration is adopted in which the light emission time in the second rainbow color is longer than the light emission time in the first rainbow color. A configuration in which the emission time in the second rainbow color is shorter than the emission time in the rainbow color, or a configuration in which the emission time in the first and second rainbow colors is the same may be adopted. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impression given by the first rainbow-colored light emission control effect (for example, the premium cut-in effect) on the entire variable effect.

  The mode of the cut-in effect and the button effect is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be any embodiment. For example, an effect may be an effect indicating that the reliability is relatively high by performing an effect display of a large number of characters (for example, own characters) crossing the screen, or an effect of operating the effect character 7.

  In addition, by executing the cut-in effect and the button effect based on the advance determination information obtained by the advance determination process, the reliability and the effect content of the look-ahead target may be suggested during the variable effect one change or more before. . For example, it may be notified that a prefetch target is a jackpot by a premier cut-in or a premier button effect.

[Icon change effect]
Next, referring to FIGS. 26 to 30, an “icon change effect” capable of changing the hold icon 54 and the icon 53 from a normal mode (for example, a default white icon) to another color or pattern. Will be described. The icon change effect is one of the notice effects. The icon change effects in the present embodiment include a “hold icon change effect” in which the mode of the hold icon 54 can be changed, and a “icon change effect” in which the icon 53 can be changed. The “suspended icon change effect” is a notice effect (prefetch effect) executed based on the preliminary determination information, and is an effect indicating the reliability of the jackpot of the target of the preliminary determination process. The holding icon change effect is, for example, an effect that is executed from when a game ball wins a starting port to when a special symbol determination based on the winning is executed. The “icon change effect” is a notice effect indicating the reliability to be executed based on the result of the special symbol judgment, and is an effect executed after the execution of the special symbol judgment.

(Pending icon change effect)
With reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the hold icon change effect will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example in which the hold icon 54 changes from green to the premium mode by the hold icon change effect. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of an icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination that occurs when the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the holding icon change effect based on the advance determination information when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 (see FIG. 40). When it is determined that the hold icon change effect is to be executed, the hold icon 54 related to the look-ahead target from the start timing of the hold icon display to immediately before the start of the variable effect corresponding to the target of the preliminary determination process (hereinafter, referred to as the “read ahead target”). An aspect (change pattern) is determined.

  When the holding icon change effect is executed, for example, the holding icon 54 related to the prefetch target is displayed in any one of white (default), blue, green, red, and “premier”. For example, the form of the hold icon 54 has a high degree of reliability in the order of white <blue <green <red <premier, and may change irreversibly in this order in the hold icon change effect (see FIG. 27). "Premier" is a mode in which it is informed that the jackpot determination is executable only when the prefetch target is a jackpot, and is an effect image in which the premier character D is wearing an rainbow effect image (FIG. 26 (D) icon 2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, with the start of the hold icon change effect, the start-up lamp 38 is set to emit light corresponding to the color of the hold icon 54 related to the prefetch target (that is, white, blue, green, red, or premier). (I.e., iridescent color corresponding to).

  In the present embodiment, for example, when in the normal mode and the holding icon change effect or the icon change effect is not executed, the start-up lamp 38 is controlled to be turned off.

  With reference to FIG. 26, for example, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the icon 53 is being performed and the number of reserved special special symbol determinations (the number of reserved special 1) is 1, the game ball wins the first starting port 11. Then, a case where execution of the hold icon change effect is determined will be described. In this example, when a prize is won, a new hold icon 54 (referred to as icon 2) is displayed in green, and this icon 2 is displayed in a variable effect (hereinafter, “1 change”) immediately before the variable effect corresponding to the prefetch target. It may be called "before.") It is determined to execute a pending icon change effect of a change pattern of changing to a premier mode at the start. It is assumed that the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed at any timing shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 26 (A), a new hold icon 54 (icon 2) is displayed in green at the timing corresponding to the winning, and the start-up lamp 38 is turned green by light emission control associated with the hold icon change effect. To start emitting light. Note that the panel lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are controlled to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the light emission control of the start-up lamp 38. For example, during the fluctuation display in which the irregularity is reported, the light emission control is performed in such a manner as to be seen in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM output from the speaker 24.

  In the present embodiment, at the start of the display of the hold icon 54 accompanying execution of the hold icon change effect, a predetermined winning sound (for example, an effect sound of “picon”) is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 26A). ).

  In addition, in this embodiment, even if the hold icon change effect (and the icon change effect) is executed, the blue character indicating the special 1 hold number and the red character indicating the special 2 hold number (in the lower left corner of the screen in FIG. 26A). The mode just above the small symbol 502) does not change.

  When the variable effect corresponding to the icon 53 ends, the icon 1 that was the first hold icon 54 is shifted and displayed as the icon, and the variable effect corresponding to the icon 1 is started (FIG. 26B )reference). Along with this, the icon 2 which was the second hold icon 54 is shifted and displayed at the place where the icon 1 was displayed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 26 (B), at the start of the fluctuating effect before one change, an “icon change image” indicating the mode of the on-hold icon 54 after the change is displayed in the center of the screen as an effect display related to the retentive icon change effect. It is displayed large. The icon change image is an effect image that is the same as the mode after the change of the hold icon 54 (or the content is related). In the example of FIG. 26, the icon change image (premier) indicating the change to the premier mode is displayed by being executed in a manner to notify that the pending icon change effect is the jackpot determination. The icon change image (premier) is an effect image that notifies that the jackpot has been determined, and is an effect image accompanied by a rainbow effect image.

  In addition, in the hold icon change effect, an effect sound of “Cuy” (hereinafter, referred to as “icon change sound (premier)”) that informs that the jackpot has been confirmed since the start of displaying the icon change image (premier). The signal is output from the speaker 24 (see FIGS. 26B and 26C).

  As illustrated in FIG. 26 (B), as the light emission control associated with the holding icon change effect, the game board 2, the frame member 3, and the vicinity of the first starting port become rainbow colors from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier). Light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the start port lamp 38 in rainbow colors is performed so that the lights appear to emit light.

  As illustrated in FIG. 26 (C), in the present embodiment, following the display of the icon change image, an effect display in which the icon change image is combined with the hold icon 54 (icon 2 in this example) is performed. If the icon change image has been successfully combined with the hold icon 54, the hold icon 54 changes to the same mode (or a similar form) as the icon change image, and if the transfer fails, the form of the hold icon 54 does not change. In the present embodiment, when the icon change image (premier) is displayed, merging always succeeds, and the mode of the hold icon 54 changes to the mode suggested by the icon change image (100% probability of merging success). On the other hand, if an icon change image indicating a change to blue, green, or red is displayed, the union fails and the icon change image is erased, and the state of the hold icon 54 remains unchanged. (So-called gaseous: sometimes referred to as a pending icon change effect (gasse)).

  In the present embodiment, the icon change image may try to unite with the icon 53 (the icon change effect described later). In this case as well, there are cases where the icon change image succeeds in merging with the icon 53 and cases where merging fails and the icon change image is erased, and the mode of the icon 53 remains unchanged ( So-called gaseous: sometimes referred to as the icon change effect (gasse).)

  It should be noted that the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C correspond to the icon change images from the start of display of the reserved icon change effect (gase) or the icon change image related to the icon change effect (gase). Light emission control in the emission color is started. This light emission control is terminated when the combination fails and the icon change image is erased thereafter, and the light emission control in the variable effect corresponding light emission is restarted. Regarding the start-up lamp 38, no change occurs in the light emission control on condition that the hold icon change effect (gase) or the icon change image related to the icon change effect (gase) is displayed or deleted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 26D, when the icon change image (premier) is successfully combined with the icon 2, the icon 2 changes to the premier mode. Specifically, the effect image in which the icon 2 has, for example, the same mode (or a similar mode) as the icon change image (premier) and in which the premier character D is wearing an rainbow effect image (hereinafter, “premier character D”) In some cases, it may be referred to as “rainbow effect image”.) At the same time, the light emission control in which the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in the rainbow color accompanying the holding icon change effect ends, and the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamp corresponding to the variable effect related to the icon 1 end. Light emission control with 37A-C resumes. The light emission control of the starting port lamp 38 in the rainbow color accompanying the hold icon change effect is continued until after the start of the change effect of the icon 2 (for example, until the end of the change effect of the icon 2).

  For this reason, in the hold icon change effect indicating the change to the premium in the present embodiment, the display of the rainbow effect image (the icon change image (premier) and the hold icon after the change) related to the premier character D is displayed by the board lamp. The light emission control is continued after the light emission control in which the lights 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in rainbow colors. That is, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <the rainbow light emission time of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C <the display time of the rainbow effect image related to the premier character D <= the start opening lamp 38 The relationship between the rainbow emission times is established.

  In the pending icon change effect indicating change to the premium, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <the display time of the icon change image (premier) = rainbow colors of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C. The relationship of the light emission time <the rainbow light emission time of the starting port lamp 38 is established.

  In the present embodiment, regarding the pending icon change effect indicating a change to a mode other than the premiere mode, the output time of the icon change sound <the time between the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in the color corresponding to the icon change image. The relationship of light emission time <display time in which the effect image in the same mode as the icon change image is displayed is established. In addition, regarding the pending icon change effect that suggests a change to a mode other than the premier mode, the output time of the icon change sound <the display time of the icon change image = the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in the color corresponding to the icon change image. And the light emission time of the starting port lamp 38 in the color corresponding to the icon change image is established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, an example of an icon mode determination table for holding the first special symbol determination generated when the number of special 1 holdings is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state will be described. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, since the reach ratio varies depending on the number of holds (see FIG. 9C), when the prefetch target is a loss, information indicating the fluctuation pattern included in the advance determination information And a variation pattern actually used in the variation display of the first special symbol. However, depending on the setting of the fluctuation pattern table (described later with reference to FIG. 37) for determining the loss fluctuation pattern, the special 1 reserved number is any one of 0 to 3 at the time of executing the first special symbol determination. However, there is pre-determination information that will be determined in the same variation pattern. In addition, even if there is an inconsistency with the fluctuation pattern actually used, there is pre-determination information such that the same reach effect is executed, and a large problem does not occur even if the hold icon change effect is executed. . Thus, in the present embodiment, control is performed so that a holding icon change effect can be executed based on such advance determination information.

  For example, when the suspension of the first special symbol determination has occurred, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the icon mode determination table for the suspension of the first special symbol determination, the current number of special 1 reservations, and the prefetch target. The change pattern of the reserved icon is determined based on the corresponding preliminary determination information and the reserved icon change effect mode random number. The hold icon change effect mode random number is a random number for determining the hold icon winning mode and a subsequent change pattern (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “change pattern”).

  For example, in the holding icon mode determination table, the determination value to be compared with the holding icon change effect mode random number is set in advance to one of a plurality of change patterns exemplified in the column of “icon display mode” in FIG. It is an allocated table. In the present embodiment, for example, an icon mode determination table is prepared in advance for each game state and each number of reserved special first symbols. FIG. 27 is an example of a holding icon mode determination table. FIG. 27 (A) is a holding table for the first special symbol determination which occurs when the number of special 1 holdings is 1 in the normal game state. 27 (B) is a table for holding the first special symbol determination which occurs when the number of special 1 holdings is 2 in the normal gaming state. In the case of “Green → Premier” illustrated in the column of “Icon display mode” in FIG. 27A, the hold icon 54 (corresponding to the icon 2 in FIG. 26) is displayed in green at the time of winning, and the change before one change It means to change to premiere during the production. In the case of “white → white” illustrated in the “icon display mode” column in FIG. 27A, the hold icon 54 is displayed in white at the time of winning, and the starter lamp 38 starts to emit white light. This means that the state of the hold icon 54 does not change while being white during the fluctuation effect one change before. In the “white → blue → green” exemplified in the “icon display mode” column in FIG. 27B, the hold icon 54 is displayed in white at the time of winning, and changes to blue during the fluctuation effect two fluctuations earlier. 3 means that the color changes to green during the change effect before the change. The sub CPU 131 determines the change pattern of the hold icon based on which change pattern the hold icon change effect mode random number matches the determination value assigned to.

In the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is set as the determination value to be compared with the execution random number for the pending icon change effect. As an example, when the preliminary determination information relating to the suspension of the first special symbol determination that occurs when the number of special 1 suspensions is 1 in the normal gaming state indicates the jackpot variation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D), the SPSP reach is performed. It is possible to perform a direct fluctuation action in which a big hit is notified. The determination values to be compared in the case of such pre-determination information are allocated as follows to each of the change patterns exemplified in the column of “big hit (%) SPSP reach, big hit, direct hit” in FIG. 27 (A). Has been. The numerical values in angle brackets indicate the assigned judgment values, and the numerical values in parentheses indicate the determination ratio.
It remains white from the time of winning to the end of the variable production one change before: "0" (1%)
White at the time of prize, and changed to blue at the end of the change effect one change before: “2, 3” (2%)
It remains blue from the time of winning to the end of the variable production one change before: "4-8" (5%)
Changed to white at the time of winning and changed to green at the end of the variable effect one change before: "8 to 12" (5%)
Blue at the time of prize and changed to green at the end of the fluctuation effect one change before: "13-22" (10%)
It remains green from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuating performance one change before: "23-32" (10%)
Changed to white at the time of the prize and changed to red at the end of the change effect one change before: “33 to 42” (10%)
Blue at the time of winning, changed to red at the end of the variable production one change before: “43-54” (12%)
Green at the time of winning and changed to red at the end of the fluctuating effect one change before: “55-69” (15%)
Remains red from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuating performance one change before: "70-89" (20%)
Changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuating effect one white change before winning: "90, 91" (2%)
Blue at the time of prize, changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuation effect one change before: “92, 93” (2%)
Green at the time of the prize, changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuation effect one change before: "94, 95" (2%)
Red at the time of the prize, changed to premiere at the end of the fluctuation production one fluctuation before: “96, 97” (2%)
Remains premium from the time of winning to the end of the fluctuating performance one change before: "98, 99" (2%)

  As shown in the determination ratios illustrated in the “big hit (%)” column and the “loss (%)” column in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the prefetch target is the big hit or the loss, The hold icon 54 is more likely to change to a higher reliability mode when a reach effect with high reliability (for example, SPSP reach) is executed than when only a reach effect with low reliability (for example, normal reach) is executed. (See FIGS. 27A and 27B).

  Also, comparing FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B, in the present embodiment, when the number of special 1 reservations when the suspension of the first special symbol determination has occurred is smaller than the case where the number of special 1 reservations is larger, the holding icon 54 Tends to change to a highly reliable mode. For example, when the number of special 1 reservations is 1, when the number of special 1 reservations is 1, the maximum is 20% at the time of the jackpot and at the time of loss, the maximum is 10%. The maximum hit is 10% and the loss is 5%.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of “direct hit” in “big hit at SPSP reach” of “big hit (%)” in FIGS. If it is related to an effect, a pending icon change effect that changes to the premier mode can be executed. However, in the case where the prefetch target is related to the fluctuation effect per resurrection, the execution of the hold icon change effect changing to the premier mode is restricted.

  Note that, when it is determined that the hold icon change effect is to be executed, a configuration that always changes to a mode other than the default may be used. For example, it is determined that the icon is left white from the time of winning to the end of the change effect one change before. In this case, the white suspension icon 54 in a non-blinking mode may be changed to a white suspension icon 54 in a rapidly blinking mode.

  The ratio illustrated in FIG. 27 is merely an example, and any ratio may be used. For example, regardless of whether the prefetching target is a direct effect or a resurrection effect, the pending icon change effect that changes to the premier mode may be controlled to be executable.

(The icon change effect)
Next, the icon change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 28 and 29 are explanatory diagrams for describing a specific example in which the icon changes in the order of green → red → premier by the icon change effect. FIG. 30 illustrates an example of the determination ratio of the change pattern of the icon change effect that finally changes the icon to the premier mode in the variable effect in which SPSP reach 1 can be executed via the normal reach and the SP reach in the normal game state. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect differs from the reserved icon change effect only in that the icon change effect is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination instead of the preliminary determination information. Specifically, the icon change effect determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect that changes the icon at the start of the change effect, and if so, at what timing of the change effect, This is different from the hold icon change effect in that it is determined whether the change is made. Except for this point, the icon change effect is exactly the same as the reserved icon change effect, and the description of the icon change effect will be omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, a description will be given of a specific example in which when the icon finally changes to the premium mode, the premium cut-in effect is executed as the cut-in effect, and the premium button effect is determined as the button effect. I do.

  The fluctuation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 28 and 29 are the same as those of FIGS. 17 and 18 to 21, and include the flow illustrated in FIG. 13, and FIGS. 13 (a), (b), (c) and (d). ), (S), (v), (e), (f), (g), (i), (j), (k), (l), (m), and (n). A specific example of a winning pattern is shown. That is, the fluctuation effects according to the specific examples of FIGS. 28 and 29 are executed corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern A11 (see FIG. 9D) of the first special symbol, as in FIGS. 17 and 18 to 21. It is possible. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 develops into the SPSP reach 1 in which the own character and the enemy F fight through the normal reach and the SP reach at the time of the start of the variable effect, and during the SPSP reach 1, the own character and the enemy It is assumed that a variable effect pattern for notifying a jackpot has been determined after the character C has entered the battle.

  In this example, at the start of the variable effect, the execution of the premium cut-in is determined as the cut-in effect, and the execution of the premium button effect is determined as the button effect. In addition, at the start of the variable effect, it is possible to execute a mini-character effect that displays a large bird (for example, an effect image in which the bird in FIG. 18A is enlarged and displayed) indicating that the jackpot is confirmed at the start of the variable effect. It has been determined (see FIG. 28B). In addition, at the time of starting the variable production, the icon is changed to red immediately after the start of the variable production, and at the timing when the character C participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy (the timing immediately after the end of the cut-in production), the premier mode It has been decided to execute the icon change effect of the change pattern of changing the icon.

  As illustrated in FIG. 28A, a loss is notified by the end of the fluctuation effect before one fluctuation, and when a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, one second) elapses, the icon is displayed in a shifted manner and a green hold is performed. The icon 54 is displayed as the icon. The light emission control of the starting port lamp 38 in the green color corresponding to the green hold icon 54 has been continued during the fluctuation effect before one fluctuation.

  In the example of FIG. 28 (B), unlike the example of FIG. 18 (A), a mini-chara effect for notifying that the big hit is confirmed at the start of the variable effect is executed as described above. However, even if such a mini-character effect is performed, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C are not controlled to emit light in the rainbow color because the light emission is controlled by the light emission corresponding to the variable effect. Thereby, it can be suggested to only some players that the jackpot is definitely determined.

  As illustrated in FIG. 28C, an icon change image (red) indicating a change to red is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen immediately after the start of the fluctuation effect. The icon change image (red) is an effect image indicating that the reliability is relatively high. In the icon change effect, from the start of the display of the icon change image (red), an effect sound of "Pew" indicating that the icon change effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "icon change sound (other than the premium)"). .) Is output from the speaker 24 (see FIGS. 28C and 28D).

  Further, as exemplified in FIGS. 28C and 28D, from the start of displaying the icon change image (red), the game board 2 and the frame member are used as light emission control associated with the icon change effect that changes to red. Light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is performed so that 3 appears to emit red light. Regarding the start port lamp 38, the light emission control in green corresponding to the green icon is continued (see FIGS. 28C and 28D).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when an icon change image (premier) indicating the change to the premier mode is displayed, the hold icon or the icon always changes (the coalescence success probability is 100%: FIGS. 26 and 29). (See (A) to (C)). On the other hand, when an icon change image indicating a change to another mode is displayed, the icon does not change when the hold icon or the icon changes (in the case of the hold icon change effect or the icon change effect). (A pending icon change effect (gase) or the icon change effect (gase)) (the union success probability is less than 100%). For this reason, the condition for the light emission control is that the change of the starting port lamp 38 is determined. Specifically, when the icon change image (premier) is displayed, the start-up lamp 38 starts to emit rainbow light from the start of the display. When an icon change image other than the icon change image (premier) is displayed, the start port lamp 38 does not emit light in the color corresponding to the mode in which the change is suggested from the start of the display, and the change after the change is suspended. The starting port lamp 38 starts to emit light in a color corresponding to the icon or the state after the icon is changed from the display start time.

  As illustrated in FIG. 28 (D), when the icon change image (red) is successfully combined with the green icon, the icon changes the icon change image, for example, to a red circle in the same mode (or a similar mode). Changes to the effect image. At the same time, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in red accompanying the icon change effect ends, and the light emission of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C corresponding to the variable effect is completed. Control resumes. Regarding the start-up lamp 38, the light-emission control of the start-up lamp 38 in accordance with the icon change effect is started so that the vicinity of the first start-up port emits red light from the start of the icon display after the change. In the start-up lamp 38, the light emission control of the icon change effect in red is continued until the next time the icon changes in the present change effect.

  Therefore, in the icon change effect indicating the change to red in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image of the red circle (the icon change image (red) and the icon after the change) is performed by the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamp. The light emission control in red at 37A to 37C is continued. That is, the relationship of the output time of the icon change sound (other than the premiere) <the red emission time of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C <the display time of the effect image of the red circle is established.

  The relationship between the output time of the icon change sound (other than the premiere) <the display time of the icon change image (red) = the red light emission time of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C <the red light emission time of the start-up opening lamp 38 Holds.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect that changes to blue or green (and the pending icon change effect) changes to a mode in which the icon changes to red, the color of the icon change image, the board lamps 25A and 25B, and the frame lamp 37A. ＣC and the starting port lamp 38 are the same except that the emission colors are different.

  After that, SPSP reach is developed through normal reach and SP reach, and the premium cut-in is executed as illustrated in FIG. From the start of the premier cut-in, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C emit light in rainbow colors by the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in. With respect to the start-up lamp 38, the light-emitting control of the start-up lamp 38 in red is continued by the light-emission control related to the icon change effect corresponding to the color red of the icon.

  Note that, with the start of the premier cut-in, the start-up lamp 38 may emit light in rainbow color by light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in. That is, the light emission control related to the premier cut-in may be executed prior to the light emission control related to the icon change effect. After the end of the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in, for example, the light emission control corresponding to the color red of the icon may be restarted to cause the starter lamp 38 to emit red light. Alternatively, for example, even after the end of the premier cut-in, the light emission control corresponding to the premier cut-in may not be ended, and the start-up lamp 38 may emit light in a rainbow color.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29A, immediately after the elimination of the premier cut-in image relating to the premier cut-in (that is, immediately before the character C participates in the battle between the character and the enemy), the fact that the jackpot has been determined is notified. As an effect, the icon change effect indicating a change to the premier mode is executed. As a result, the icon change image (premier) accompanied by the rainbow effect image is displayed large in the center of the screen. As illustrated in FIGS. 29A and 29B, from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier), for example, an icon change sound (premier) of “Cui” is output from the speaker 24. Also, from the start of displaying the icon change image (premier), the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the start-up opening lamp 38 are rainbow-colored by the light emission control associated with the icon change effect that changes to the premier mode. Is emitted.

  Thus, following the premier cut-in and when the icon change effect is executed in a jackpot-determined manner, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C continue to emit light in rainbow colors over these effects. Will be. Thereby, it is possible to give continuity between different announcement effects, and it is possible to realize an effect that makes it easy for a player to recognize that a big hit has occurred.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29C, at the timing when the character C participates in the battle between the own character and the enemy, the icon change image (premier) successfully combines with the red icon, and the icon is in the premier mode. Changes to Specifically, for example, the icon is in the same mode (or similar mode) as the icon change image (premier), and the effect image in which the premiere character D is wearing a rainbow effect image (rainbow according to the premier character D) Color effect image). At the same time, the light emission control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C in the rainbow color accompanying the icon change effect is ended, and the control of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C corresponding to the change effect is completed. Light emission control is restarted. Regarding the starting port lamp 38, light emission in rainbow colors is continued.

  Therefore, in the icon change effect indicating the change to the premier in the present embodiment, the display of the rainbow effect image (the icon change image (premier) and the icon after the change) related to the premiere character D is displayed by the board lamp. The light emission control of the rainbow colors of the frame lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C is continued. That is, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <the rainbow light emission time of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C <the display time of the rainbow effect image related to the premier character D <= the start opening lamp 38 The relationship between the rainbow emission times is established.

  In addition, in the icon change effect indicating the change to the premiere, the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <the display time of the icon change image (premier) = rainbow colors of the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C. The relationship of the light emission time <the rainbow light emission time of the starting port lamp 38 is established.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29 (D), when the start timing of the button suggestion effect arrives, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C become white as the effect image related to the button suggestion effect is displayed. To start blinking. Regarding the starting port lamp 38, light emission in rainbow colors is continued. As described above, the light emission control associated with the button suggestion effect is performed using the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the light emission control associated with the icon change effect is performed using the start-up lamp 38.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29 (E), when the start timing of the premier button effect arrives, the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C become rainbow colors as the effect image related to the button effect is displayed. To start emitting light. In addition, when the button lamp 262 starts emitting light in the rainbow color, the effect button 26 that has been turned off from the start of the change emits light in the rainbow color. Regarding the starting opening lamp 38, the light emission in the rainbow color is continued by the light emission control related to the icon change effect before the start of the premium button effect. As described above, the light emission control associated with the premier button effect is performed using the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the button lamp 262, and the light emission control associated with the icon change effect is performed using the start-up lamp 38. Done.

  Note that, with the start of the premier button effect, the light emission control of the starting port lamp 38 may be switched from the light emission control of the icon change effect to the light emission control of the premium button effect. Regardless of which light emission control is performed, the starting port lamp 38 emits light in rainbow colors. However, unlike the light emission control according to the icon change effect, if the light emission control is related to the premium button effect, the board lamps 25A and 25B are used. The start-up lamp 38 is controlled to emit light in a rainbow color in a mode synchronized with the frame lamps 37A to 37C (for example, a mode in which the emission color is switched at the same timing as these various lamps (see FIGS. 2 and 3)). It is possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to give a unified feeling to the light emission of the various lamps in rainbow colors with the start of the premier button effect. For example, regarding the start-up lamp 38, during the premier button effect, the light emission control according to the premier button effect is executed prior to the light emission control according to the icon change effect, and the premier button effect ends (that is, the valid period ends). , The light emission control for the icon change effect may be restarted. Further, with respect to the starting port lamp 38, the light emission control according to the icon change effect may be ended on condition that the premium button effect is started, and the light emission control according to the premium button effect may be performed during the premium button effect. , May be turned off. Further, with respect to the start-up lamp 38, light emission control relating to an effect started with various effects (specifically, a hit operation effect, a victory effect, a hit notification, a re-change effect, a successful effect, a failed effect) is started. May be started or turned off.

  After FIG. 29 (E), the effect proceeds as in the example described with reference to FIG. 17 and FIG. 21, and a direct hit occurs (see FIG. 29 (F)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, in the normal game state, the icon change effect change pattern in which the icon is finally changed to the premier mode in the variable effect in which the SPSP reach 1 can be executed via the normal reach and the SP reach. Will be described. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the time of starting the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 43). reference). When it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, at the start of the change display of the first special symbol, for example, based on the change effect pattern and the current color of the hold icon to be used this time, the final icon The final mode, which is the mode, and the change timing at which the icon is changed are determined by random number lottery. Here, for example, one or a plurality of timings at which an icon change effect (a pending icon change effect and the icon change effect) can be executed are predetermined in each of the variable effects. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines the timing of changing the icon to the final mode in the current fluctuation effect at the time of starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and when changing the icon plural times, the change timing of each time. And the mode after each change. The icon change effect is performed based on such a change pattern.

  According to the example of the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, when the final mode of the icon is the premier mode, the SPSP reach 1 starts before the start of the SPSP reach 1 (for example, at the start of the fluctuation effect). The icon is more likely to change than later (for example, when shifting to the own character advantageous route or the own character disadvantageous route (see FIGS. 13H and 13I)). This allows the player to recognize that the change at an earlier stage has higher reliability.

  When the icon changes to the premier mode by the second change, during the SPSP Reach 1 (specifically, any one of the characters A to C in the battle between the own character and the enemy) (The timing at which the character enters the battle). Thus, for example, even if the reliability changes to a relatively low aspect (for example, blue) in the first change, it is possible to enjoy the production with a thrilling feeling until the end of the variable production.

  The ratio illustrated in FIG. 30 is merely an example, and any ratio may be used. For example, regardless of whether the prefetching target is a direct effect or a resurrection effect, the pending icon change effect that changes to the premier mode may be controlled to be executable.

  Note that the icon change effect (the holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) of the present embodiment requires a certain amount of time for the effect display related to the change. Therefore, in a specific fluctuation effect (for example, a fluctuation effect corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern H12 having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (see FIG. 9D)), the icon change effect may be controlled so as not to be executable. In addition, as the icon change effects in which the effect display (and the time required for the change) related to the change are different from each other, an icon change effect that can be executed in any of the change effects and a specific change effect (for example, a loss pattern H12 corresponds to the loss pattern H12). In the variation effect), an icon change effect that cannot be executed may be prepared in advance.

[Modification of icon change effect]
In addition, in the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect or the icon change effect), the timing at which the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C start to emit light in the color corresponding to the icon change image is determined by the display time of the icon change image. It may be before the start or after the start of the display. The timing may be before the start of output of the icon change sound (premier) or after the start of output.

  Specifically, for example, in the case of a pending icon change effect indicating a change to the premier mode, after the display of the icon change image (premier) starts to be displayed (for example, two seconds later), the board lamps 25A and 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37A to C and the start-up lamp 38 may be controlled to emit light in a rainbow color. As a result, it is possible to cause the entire game machine to emit rainbow light after the player's attention is directed to the icon change image.

  Further, for example, before the display of the icon change image (premier) is started (for example, two seconds before), the panel lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the start-up lamp 38 may be controlled to emit light in rainbow colors. This makes it possible to display the icon change image after suggesting to the player that the big hit has been confirmed.

  In addition, regarding the icon change effect, control is performed such that the relationship of the output time of the icon change sound (premier) <the display time of the rainbow effect image related to the premier character D <= the time of the light emission control in the rainbow color is established. You may.

  In addition, in the icon change effect indicating the change to the premier mode (the pending icon change effect or the icon change effect), the display time of the icon change image (premier), the output time of the icon change sound (premier), the board lamp 25A , 25B and the frame lamps 37A to 37C may be in any relationship.

  The effect means for emitting light in relation to the icon change effect is not limited to the above, and one or two effect means of the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the starter lamp 38 may be caused to emit light, Other effect means capable of emitting light (for example, effect character 7) may emit light.

  Hereinafter, an example of a process performed by the gaming machine 1 to realize the various effects described above will be described in detail.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during a normal operation excluding a special case such as power-on or power-off. When a timer interrupt occurs, the game control board 100 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. The processing shown in FIGS. 31 to 37 is performed in accordance with a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 executes a random number updating process for updating a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number by software (step S1).

  For example, each random number is incremented by "1" each time the processing in step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing in step S1, and each random number is returned to “0” and updated after reaching a preset maximum value. It is to be noted that the jackpot random number may be updated in advance by software, or each random number may be generated by calculating a value generated by using the random number circuit 104 and a value generated by software.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 detects that a game ball has won the first starting port 11 and a first starting port switch 111 for detecting that a game ball has won the first starting port 11. A switch process is performed to determine the state of the detection signal input from each switch such as the second start-up switch 112 (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then determines the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the indicated special symbol is executed (step S3). In the special symbol processing, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit type, a variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like. This special symbol processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol determination, includes a process of displaying a normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

  Subsequent to the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs an electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port 12 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol judgment. Is executed (step S5).

  Subsequent to the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is a big hit in the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 controls the special winning opening control unit 118 to open the special winning opening 13 to open the special winning opening 13. Execute (step S6). Although a detailed description is omitted, the special winning opening opening control process is a process of controlling a big hit game, and a special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating that it is determined to execute the big hit game is a first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, this is performed when the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling payout of a prize ball according to a winning of a game ball (step S7).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits the various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the processing steps before step S7 and information necessary for determining the effect contents to the effect control board 130. The process is executed (Step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing in step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111, and determines the special symbol at the time when the detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111. A first start-up switch process including a process of obtaining random numbers (jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number) is performed (step S21). This first starting port switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 and obtains a random number for a special symbol determination at the time when the detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 112. Then, a second start-up switch process including a process to perform the process is executed (step S22). This second starting port switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114, and executes a gate switch process of acquiring a normal symbol random number at the time when the detection signal is input from the gate switch 114 (step S23). ).

[First starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of the first startup port switch process in step S21 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first startup port switch 111 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first startup port switch 111. (Step S2101). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON” is input, it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S2101: YES), the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation are obtained as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination. A pattern random number is obtained (steps S2102 to 2105).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is the maximum reserved number Umax1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 (“4” in the present embodiment). ) Is determined (step S2106).

  When determining that the number of holds U1 is less than the maximum number of holds Umax1 (step S2106: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number of holds U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2107).

  Subsequent to the process of step S2107, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is "ON" (step S2108). The time reduction game flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when the current game state is the time reduction state, and is set to “OFF” when the current game state is the non-time reduction state.

  When determining that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (that is, “OFF”) (step S2108: NO), the main CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process (step S2109). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines a jackpot based on the acquired information obtained in the processes of steps S2102 to S2105 prior to a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) and a variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 37) described later. Is determined in advance, and the type of variation pattern to be determined is determined in advance.

  Following the processing of step S2109, the main CPU 101 stores the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination processing of step S2109 and the various random numbers obtained in the processing of steps S2102 to 2105 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 ( Step S2110).

  When determining that the time-saving game flag is “ON” (step S2108: YES), the main CPU 101 stores the various random numbers acquired in the processing of steps S2102 to 2105 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 (step S2111).

  When executing the processing of step S2110 or step S2111, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2112). This suspension command is a command notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S2109. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8.

  When the processing of step S2112 is performed, when it is determined that the first start-up switch 111 is not “ON” (step S2101: NO), or when it is determined that the number of holdings U1 is not less than the maximum number of holdings Umax1 (Step S2106: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Second starting port switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the second startup port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 34, following the first start-up switch processing in step S21, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second start-up switch has been input from the second start-up switch 112 or not. It is determined whether the switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S2201). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the second starting port switch 112 has been turned “ON” is input, it is determined that the second starting port switch 112 has been turned “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S2201: YES), the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation are obtained as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination. A pattern random number is obtained (steps S2202 to 2205).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is the maximum reserved number Umax2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 (“4” in the present embodiment). ) Is determined (step S2206).

  When determining that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S2206: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2207).

  Subsequent to the process of step S2207, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is “ON” as in the process of step S2108 (step S2208). When determining that the time-saving game flag is “ON” (step S2208: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process (step S2209).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2209, the main CPU 101 stores the preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination processing of step S2209 and the various random numbers obtained in the processing of steps S2202 to 2205 in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103 ( Step S2210).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction game flag is not “ON” (that is, “OFF”) (step S2208: NO), the various random numbers acquired in the processing of steps S2202 to 2205 are stored in the reserved storage area in the main RAM 103. (Step S2211).

  When executing the processing of step S2210 or step S2211, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2112). This suspension command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, and includes the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S2210. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8.

  When the process of step S2212 is performed, when it is determined that the second starting port switch 112 is not “ON” (step S2201: NO), or when it is determined that the number of holdings U2 is not less than the maximum number of holdings Umax2 (Step S2206: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the processing shown in FIG.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 35, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a big hit game is being performed based on whether or not the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). The big hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit game is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the big hit game and set to “OFF” at the end of the big hit game. Here, when it is determined that a big hit game is being played (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to a normal symbol process of step S4.

  When it is determined that the big hit game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being fluctuated and displayed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether the reserved number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the reserved number U2 is equal to or more than “1” (step S303: YES), the reserved number U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S304).

  When determining that the reserved number U2 is not equal to or more than “1” (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1”. Is determined (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the reserved number U1 is not equal to or more than “1” (step S305: NO), the process proceeds to the ordinary symbol process of step S4.

  Although not shown in the figure, when it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is not equal to or more than “1”, the main CPU 101 determines, for example, that there is no suspension of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination, and the special symbol At the timing when the variable display is not performed, a customer waiting command for notifying that a customer waiting state is set is set in the main RAM 103. This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S8 (see FIG. 31), and when the waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without the special symbol change display being performed as it is, the effect control board 130 The sub CPU 131 sets a customer waiting effect start command instructing the start of the “customer waiting effect” in the sub RAM 133, for example. The customer waiting effect is started in response to the transmission of the customer waiting effect start command to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission processing in step S30 (see FIG. 38). The “customer waiting effect” is, for example, an effect that starts when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the loss is notified. For example, in the customer waiting effect, a company name movie (not shown) for advertising a company that manufactures or sells the gaming machine 1, a demonstration movie (not shown) for advertising the gaming machine 1, A menu screen (not shown) for making settings is displayed over time in this order. In the present embodiment, with the start of the reproduction of the company name movie, the stage 7, the board lamps 25A and 25B, the frame lamps 37A to 37C, and the starting opening lamps so that the entire gaming machine appears to emit rainbow light. Light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting element 38 to emit light in a rainbow color. The emission control in the rainbow color is continued, for example, until the reproduction of the demonstration moving image is started. Although a detailed description is omitted, the company name video is a video that may be played even during a jackpot game (for example, at the end of the jackpot game). Is performed. As described above, by using the light emission control in the rainbow color indicating that the jackpot is determined, to the company name moving image during the jackpot game, the impression of the company name can be improved. In addition, by playing the company name video in the same mode as during the jackpot game during the customer waiting effect, the player who has seen the customer waiting effect wants to play a game with the gaming machine 1 by recalling a good impression when the jackpot has been achieved. It is possible to make them think.

  When determining that the number of reservations U1 is equal to or more than “1” (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S306).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift processing for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when executing the shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the second special symbol determination hold storage region by using the determination storage region. And the remaining acquired information is shifted upward by one entry. The storage area for determination is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When the shift process is performed subsequent to the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first special symbol determination hold storage area is shifted to the determination storage area, and the remaining information is shifted to the remaining storage area. The acquired information is shifted upward by one entry.

  Subsequent to the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area (step S309). This big hit determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information determined in the process of step S309 is the one related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A change start command including information indicating whether the change is related, setting information of the change pattern determined in the process of step S310, information on the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like are set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

  This change start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8. Thus, the variable display 501 of the decorative pattern 501 on the liquid crystal screen 5 is started.

  Subsequent to the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol change display based on the change pattern setting information included in the change start command set in step S311 (step S312). At this time, when the processing of steps S309 to 311 is performed in a state where the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area, the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Start the variable display of. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state in which the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the second special symbol display 42 starts to display the variation of the special symbol. .

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

  If the main CPU 101 has executed the processing of step S313 or determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the processing of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the fluctuation time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the change time corresponding to the changed change pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the processing proceeds to the ordinary symbol processing of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuating time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the decorative symbol 501 that has been variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or losing symbol) determined in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variably displayed. This special symbol stop display is continued at least until a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, one second) elapses.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner and then displays the special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time started to be measured in the process of step S313 (step S318), and sets an opening command for starting a big hit game when a big hit is made. The in-stop processing including the above is executed (step S319). When the opening command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8 (see FIG. 31), the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130, for example, instructs the start of the opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot. An effect start command is set in the sub RAM 133. The opening effect (see FIG. 21H) is started in response to the transmission of the opening effect start command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission processing of step S30 (see FIG. 38).

[Big hit determination process by game control board 100]
FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. The main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area (step S3091). Specifically, when the current gaming state is the low-probability state, the main CPU 101 reads a low-probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the high-probability state, the main CPU 101 reads a high-probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets the table in the main RAM 103. For example, in the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table, a determination value to be compared with a jackpot random number is assigned in advance to a jackpot or a loss. The main CPU 101 determines that the value of the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S2102 in FIG. 33 (or the process in step S2202 in FIG. 34) matches any of the determination values defined in the jackpot determination table set in the main RAM 103. Or not, it is determined whether or not a jackpot.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance, and determines the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091. The type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area, and the setting information is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3093). By determining the type of the jackpot symbol, the type of the jackpot is determined. Specifically, for example, when the symbol random number is related to the first special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 specifies the symbol random number in a first start-up symbol determination table (not shown). The big hit symbol is determined based on which judgment value matches. When the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 matches the symbol random number with any determination value defined in the second start-up symbol determination table (not shown). The jackpot symbol is determined based on whether the game is to be performed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3092: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the lost symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). Thereby, in the process of step S317, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed. Thus, the main CPU 101 ends the processing shown in FIG.

[Variation pattern determination processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern determination process in step S310 of FIG. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S3091 is a jackpot (step S3101). Here, when it is determined that a big hit is detected (step S3101: YES), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102). The fluctuation pattern table is a table in which a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol is associated with a determination value for comparison with a fluctuation pattern random number, and is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance for each game state.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3101: NO), that is, if it is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol from a fluctuation pattern of a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) or less. It is determined whether or not (step S3103). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the reach random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3091 is the reach random number based on the number of reserved special symbol determinations having the same winning start opening. It is determined which one of the determination values for comparison matches.

  When determining the variation pattern of the special symbol from the variation pattern exceeding a specific number of seconds (for example, 13.5 seconds) (step S3103: NO), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. (Step S3104). On the other hand, when it is determined from the fluctuation pattern of a specific number of seconds or less (step S3103: NO), the non-reach fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the processing of step S3102, the processing of step S3104, or the processing of step S3105, and sets the setting information. It is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines which of the determination values specified in the variation pattern table matches the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S3091. Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 sets a special value based on which of the determination values specified in the jackpot variation pattern table the variation pattern random number matches. A pattern fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, for example, when the non-reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the suspended number after the shift processing in step S308 based on the variation pattern random number. The setting information of the fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command together with the setting information of the special symbol set in the main RAM 103 by the big hit determination processing of step S309 described above, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S8. . Thus, the main CPU 101 ends the processing shown in FIG.

[Timer interrupt processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. In the following, description will be given assuming that the processing shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 is performed by the effect control board 130. However, a part or all of the processing is performed by the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150. May be executed in any of the above.

  The sub CPU 131 in the effect control board 130 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 38 every fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt processing performed in the game control board 100. The processing shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  The sub CPU 131 first executes a command receiving process for performing a process according to a command from the game control board 100 (step S10), and then executes a transmission process (step S30). In the command receiving process, a process according to receiving various commands from the game control board 100 and the lamp control board 150 is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 receives a command as game information from the game control board 100, for example, and sets the effect content according to the received command. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and determines whether or not to execute a notice effect that can be executed in the determined variation effect pattern and the content. Then, the sub CPU 131 generates a command for instructing execution of the determined effect, for example, and transmits the command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. Thus, the effect of the content determined on the effect control board 130 is executed by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. The command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process in step S30, the sub CPU 131 performs a data transfer process (step S50). The sub CPU 131 transmits the data transmitted from the image and sound control board 140 in order to, for example, control the light emission of the frame lamps 37 and the like and control (for example, operate) the stage productions 7 and the like at the start of each effect. The data is transferred to the lamp control board 150. By performing the data transfer process, for example, light emission control for emitting the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 in conjunction with the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect sound output by the speaker 24 is performed. Or the stage combination 7 is operated. Thus, the sub CPU 131 ends the processing illustrated in FIG.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 39, first, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 or the lamp control board has been received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command has been received (step S11: YES), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S2112 (see FIG. 33) or step S2212 (see FIG. 34). It is determined whether the command is a hold command (step S12). Here, when it is determined that the received command is not the hold command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S14 described below.

  When determining that the received command is the hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a hold command receiving process (step S13). In the hold command receiving process, the sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon display command including setting information on the display mode of the hold icon 54 in the sub RAM 133. This hold command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the hold command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the change start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S311 (see FIG. 35). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). Here, when it is determined that the received command is not the change start command (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S16 described below.

  When determining that the received command is the change start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a change start command receiving process (step S15). In the variation start command receiving process, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command by lottery using the variation effect pattern random number. This change start command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the change start command (step S14: NO), the symbol determination command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S316 (see FIG. 35) Is determined (step S16). If the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is a symbol confirmation command (step S16: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a fluctuation effect end command in the sub RAM 133 (step S17). By transmitting the variable effect end command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission processing in step S30, the decorative symbol 501 and the small symbol 502 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 with the stop display of the special symbol. It will be stopped and displayed.

  When determining that the received command is not the symbol confirmation command (step S16: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S18). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27. The operation command includes information indicating which of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 has been operated, and information indicating which key has been operated when the effect key 27 has been operated.

  When determining that the operation command has been received (step S18: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the operation effect start command in the sub RAM 133 (step S19). This command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission processing in step S30. By receiving this command, the image sound control board 140 can execute an effect using images and sounds using the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24, for example, according to the operation during the valid period. Further, by receiving this command, the lamp control board 150 can execute an effect of causing various lamps to emit light in accordance with the operation during the valid period.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not the operation command (step S18: NO), the sub CPU 131 ends the processing illustrated in FIG. Although not shown in the figure, if the sub CPU 131 determines that another command has been received in the command receiving process, the sub CPU 131 executes a process according to the command. For example, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received, the sub CPU 131 starts measuring a waiting time (for example, 30 seconds). After that, if the standby time has elapsed without receiving the fluctuation start command, a customer waiting effect start command instructing the start of the customer waiting effect is set in the sub RAM 133. Further, for example, when determining that the opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received, the sub CPU 131 sets an opening command for instructing the start of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot.

[Holding Command Receiving Process by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step S13 of FIG. When determining that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 adds “1” to the number of held special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. The updated value is updated (step S1311). Specifically, based on the winning opening information included in the preliminary determination information in the hold command, whether the command is a hold command related to the first special symbol determination or a hold command related to the second special symbol determination Is determined, and based on the determination result, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination or the number of reservations related to the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1311, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the preliminary determination information included in the received hold command, and stores the analysis result in the sub RAM 133 (step S1312).

  Next, the sub CPU 131 obtains an effect control random number such as an execution random number and a mode random number for a reserved icon change effect, and an execution control random number and a mode random number for a reserved icon change effect (gasse), and stores them in the sub RAM 133 (steps S1313 and Step S1314). The holding icon change effect execution random number is a random number for determining whether or not a hold icon change effect is to be executed. The hold icon change effect mode random number is a hold icon winning mode and a subsequent change pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a change pattern). This may be simply referred to as a “change pattern”.) The execution random number for the pending icon change effect (gasse) is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gasse). This is a random number for determining the mode of the icon change image according to (Gase).

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described where the random number is a random number updated by the effect control board 130 and is a random number acquired when a hold command is received from the game control board 100. Note that the timing for acquiring the random number is not limited to the time when the hold command is received. For example, the random number may be acquired when it is determined that the holding icon change effect can be executed (when YES is determined in the process of step S1315 described later). Further, for example, when determining the change pattern of the pending icon change effect, the random number for the mode of the hold icon change effect may be acquired.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1314, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the pending icon change effect can be executed (step S1315). For example, when the setting information of the holding icon change effect has already been set in the sub RAM 133, or when a big hit game is being played, it is determined that the holding icon change effect is not executable. When it is determined that the holding icon change effect is not executable (step S1315: NO), the process proceeds to step S1321.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold icon change effect (gase) or the setting information of the icon change effect (gase) has already been set in the sub RAM 133, it is determined that the hold icon change effect is executable. Is determined.

  When determining that the holding icon change effect is executable (step S1315: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (step S1316). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a holding icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the preliminary determination information corresponding to the current hold command (that is, corresponding to the prefetch target), and the execution random number for the hold icon change effect acquired in the process of step S1313, the hold icon change effect is generated. Decide whether to execute.

  The hold icon change effect execution lottery table is, for example, the determination value to be compared with the hold icon change effect execution random number, the determination result of "execute" the hold icon change effect and the determination result of "do not execute" It is a table assigned to any of them in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the pending icon change effect based on which of the determination values the execution random number for the pending icon change effect matches with the determination value assigned to the determination result.

  For example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value to be compared with the holding icon change effect execution random number, the determination value to be compared when the preliminary determination information indicates the jackpot is “execute”. “0-39” is assigned to the determination result (execution ratio 40%), and “40-99” is assigned to the determination result of “not executed” (non-execution ratio 60%). ). On the other hand, as a determination value to be compared when the advance determination information indicates a loss, “0 to 29” is assigned to the determination result of “execute” (execution ratio 30%), and “not executed” "30-99" is allocated to the determination result of "" (non-execution ratio 70%).

  As described above, the holding icon change effect is more easily executed when the prefetch target is a big hit than when the target is a loss. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reliability is higher when the hold icon change effect is executed than when it is not executed.

  When determining that the holding icon change effect is to be executed (step S1316: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines a change pattern of the holding icon (step S1317). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a holding icon mode determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, the change pattern of the hold icon is determined based on the table, the current special 1 hold number, the advance determination information corresponding to the prefetch target, and the hold icon change effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1313. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the pending icon change effect. An example of the determination ratio is as described above with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 stores the current number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination in the variation counter stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1318). The change number counter is a variable for counting the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination until the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target of the reserved icon change effect is executed.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1316, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) (step S1319). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a holding icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the preliminary determination information corresponding to the prefetch target, and the execution random number for the holding icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1314, whether to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) is determined. To decide.

  The hold icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table includes, for example, a determination result that the determination value compared with the hold icon change effect (gase) execution random number indicates “execute” the hold icon change effect (gase) and “execution”. This table is pre-assigned to any of the determination results of “No”. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect (gase) based on which determination result the held icon change effect (gase) execution random number matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above-mentioned table, it is set in advance that the ratio determined to be executed is higher in the case where the advance determination information indicates a loss than in the case where the prior determination information indicates a jackpot.

  As described above, the hold icon change effect (gase) is more difficult to execute when the prefetch target is a big hit than when the target is a loss. For this reason, the player can recognize that the reliability is lower when the hold icon change effect (gase) is executed than when it is not executed.

  When it is determined as YES in the process of step S1319, the sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the holding icon change effect (gase) (step S1320). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a holding icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, the mode of the pending icon change effect (gase) is determined based on the table, the preliminary determination information corresponding to the prefetch target, and the random number for the hold icon change effect (gase) acquired in the process of step S1314, The setting is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the pending icon change effect (gase).

  The pending icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table includes, for example, three determination results of “blue”, “green”, and “red” in which the determination values to be compared with the hold icon change effect (gase) mode random numbers Are tables which are respectively assigned in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the pending icon change effect (gasse) based on which determination result the random number matches the determination value assigned to the determination result. For example, in the above table, it is set in advance that a case where the advance determination information indicates a loss is more likely to be determined as blue and a case where the advance determination information indicates a loss than green and red.

  The sub CPU 131 sets an icon display command in the sub RAM 133 when executing step S1320, executing step S1318, or determining NO in the process of step S1319 (step S1321). The icon display command includes pre-determination information, winning start-up information, and the like obtained based on the hold command, and includes the setting information when the process of step S1317 or step S1320 is performed. This icon display command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 38). Thus, the effect that the hold icon is displayed in the determined mode on the effect control board 130 or the start-up lamp 38 emits light in the emission color corresponding to the displayed hold icon is generated by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp. This is realized by the control board 150.

[Variation start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a variation start command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 in response to receiving the variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command receiving process in step S15 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 39, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is a fluctuation start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires a fluctuation effect pattern random number and stores the random number in the sub RAM 133. (Step S151). The sub CPU 131 such as the variation effect pattern random number acquires the value at the time of receiving the variation start command as the variation effect pattern random number.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S151, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the change start command received from the game control board 100 (step S152). The change start command includes, as described above, information on whether a jackpot has been determined, which indicates the result of the jackpot determination (see FIG. 36), the type of the special symbol, the setting information on the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. , Etc. are included. By performing this process, the sub CPU 131 obtains information necessary for determining a variable effect pattern.

  Subsequent to the process of step S152, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a big hit is determined in the big hit determination (see FIG. 36) based on, for example, the analysis result of the change start command (step S153).

  If it is a jackpot (step S153: YES), the sub CPU 131 reads a jackpot variation effect pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S154).

  In the variation effect pattern table, one or more types of variation effect patterns are associated in advance with each of the combinations of the jackpot design, the type of the jackpot symbol, and the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of the jackpot. It is a table. In the sub-ROM 132, for example, a variation effect pattern table for a normal game state, a certain change game state, and a time reduction game state is stored in advance.

  For example, according to the flow of the variable effect described in FIG. 9 and FIG. 13, a hit notification based on the symbol arrangement is given at the end of any of the reach effects in the large effect variable effect pattern table set according to the normal gaming state. Are associated with each other.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S153, that is, in the case of a loss, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not it is possible to select a fluctuation effect pattern capable of executing a reach effect based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, for example. Is determined (step S155). If the sub CPU 131 determines YES in the process of step S155, the sub CPU 131 sets a reach effect variation effect pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state in the sub RAM 133 (step S156). For example, in the fluctuation effect pattern table for reach with which is set according to the normal game state, the loss notification by the reach loss eye at the end of any of the reach effects is performed by the flow of the fluctuation effect as described in FIGS. The fluctuating effect patterns to be performed are associated with each other.

  When NO is determined in the process of step S155, the sub CPU 131 sets a reach effect-free variation effect pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the current game state in the sub RAM 133 (step S157). For example, in the fluctuation effect pattern table for no reach set according to the normal game state, the fluctuation effect pattern in which the reach is not established and the loss is notified by the irregularity is performed by the flow of the effect described in FIG. Corresponding.

  When executing the processing of step S157, executing the processing of step S154, or executing the processing of step S156, the sub CPU 131 determines one variable effect pattern (step S158).

  For example, when the current game state is the normal game state, a variable effect pattern table corresponding to the normal game state is set in the processing of step S154, step S156, or step S157. In such a case, in the process of step S158, any one of the variable effect patterns for realizing the effect as described with reference to FIG. 13 is determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S158, the sub CPU 131 executes a final stop symbol determination process of performing a process of determining a temporary symbol 501 and a decorative symbol 501 (and a small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed (step S159). The final stop symbol determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S159, the sub CPU 131 executes a preview effect pattern determination process for performing a process of determining the setting content of the icon change effect (step S160). The notice effect pattern determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S160, the sub CPU 131 sets a variable effect start command including information indicating the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 and information indicating the setting content determined in the processes of step S159 and step S160. (Step S161). The variable effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 38). Thus, the variable effect in the mode determined on the effect control board 130 is realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S161, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the value of the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S162). Thus, the sub CPU 131 ends the processing shown in FIG.

[Final stop symbol determination processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the final stop symbol determination process in step S159 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 131 is, for example, an effect control random number that is updated by the random number circuit 135 of the effect control board 130, and is a temporary stop display and a decoration that is stopped and displayed with the special symbol stop display. Various random numbers used to determine the symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) are acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1711).

  In the present embodiment, the small symbol 502 is temporarily stopped or stopped in the same combination as the temporarily stopped display and the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed. For this reason, in the following description made with reference to FIG. 42, only the decorative pattern 501 will be described, and the description of the small pattern 502 will be omitted.

  In addition, the small symbol 502 of a combination different from the decorative symbol 501 may be stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol. For example, in the case of a jackpot, the decorative symbol 501 is stopped and displayed in a mode including a special symbol, while the small symbol 502 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination (for example, an irregular eye) to notify the jackpot. Is also good. In such a case, the combination of the decorative symbols 501 to be stopped (and temporarily stopped) and the combination of the small symbols 502 correspond to the types of big hits, and the decorative symbols 501 to be stopped (and temporarily stopped) to be displayed. And the small symbol 502 may be in a one-to-one correspondence.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the sub CPU 131 includes an odd-even random number, a jackpot stop symbol random number, a promotion random number, a jackpot temporary stop symbol random number, a reach loss symbol random number, a left decorative symbol random number, a right decorative symbol random number, and a middle symbol. Get the decorative pattern random number.

  The odd-even random number is a random number for determining which of odd-numbered symbol arrangement and even-numbered symbol alignment. The jackpot stop symbol random number is a random number for determining the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed in a symbol aligned mode. The promotion random number is a random number for determining whether or not to change from even-numbered pattern matching to odd-numbered pattern matching via the re-fluctuation effect. The jackpot temporary stop symbol random number is a medium decoration symbol 501B (that is, with the start of the victory effect, which is temporarily stopped and displayed with the start of the victory effect when changing from even-numbered symbols to odd-numbered symbols through a re-floating effect. This is a random number for determining the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) of the even symbol pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed. The reach loss symbol random number is a random number of a combination of decorative symbols 501 (for example, for reaching symbol determination) at the time of the loss notification in the reach effect. The left decorative symbol random number, the right decorative symbol random number, and the middle decorative symbol random number are random numbers for determining a combination (for example, a ragged pattern) of the decorative symbols 501 when a loss effect is performed without performing a reach effect. is there.

  The timing for acquiring the various random numbers is not limited to the above. For example, when a variation start command is received from the game control board 100 (immediately before execution of step S151), when a variation effect pattern random number is acquired (when step S151 is executed), Alternatively, it may be acquired at the time of analyzing the fluctuation start command (when executing step S152).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1711, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a big hit has been determined in the big hit determination (see FIG. 36) based on the analysis result of the change start command (step S1712).

  When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S1712: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol indicates a 6R probability change or a 16R probability change (that is, a probability change hit) (step S1713). If YES is determined in the process of step S1713, the sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed in the form of symbol alignment as one of an odd symbol and an even symbol (that is, one symbol to nine symbols) ( Step S1714). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an odd / even lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133, for example. Then, based on the table and the odd-numbered even-numbered random number acquired in the process of step S1711, it is determined which of odd-numbered symbol alignment and even-numbered symbol alignment is to be selected.

  The odd-even lottery table is, for example, a table in which a determination value compared with an odd-even random number is a table previously assigned to one of a determination result of “make an odd symbol” and a determination result of “make an even symbol”. It is. The sub CPU 131 determines which of the odd symbol arrangement and the even symbol arrangement is to be based on whether the odd-even random number matches the judgment value assigned to which judgment result.

  For example, if “0 to 99” is set as a determination value to be compared with an odd-even random number, “0 to 98” is assigned to the determination result of “make an odd symbol” (determination ratio 99%) and “99” are assigned to the determination result of “make an even symbol” (determination ratio 1%). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a probability change, the odd symbols are more likely to be stopped and displayed than the even symbols.

  Subsequently, a large hit stop symbol lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 132 in advance is set in the sub-RAM 133. Then, the decorative symbol 501 to be stopped and displayed is determined on the basis of the table, the determination result of the odd symbol alignment or the even symbol alignment, and the jackpot stop symbol random number acquired in the process of step S1711. decide.

  In the jackpot stop symbol lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the jackpot stop symbol random number is any one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 symbols corresponding to the case where odd symbols are aligned. It is assigned in advance to the determination result corresponding to the symbol. In addition, in correspondence with the case where the even symbols are aligned, in the jackpot stop symbol lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the jackpot stop symbol random number is any one of 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols. It is assigned in advance to the determination result corresponding to the symbol. The sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stop-displayed based on which determination result the hit symbol random number for jackpot matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, all symbols are set in advance so as to be determined at the same ratio.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1714, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to promote the symbol through the re-fluctuation effect (step S1715). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a promotion lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table and the promotion random number acquired in the process of step S1711, it is determined whether to promote the symbol. In the present embodiment, when the symbol is determined to be an even symbol in the process of step S1714, the determination in step S1715 is NO, and when the symbol is determined to be an odd symbol, it is determined whether or not to be promoted.

  The promotion lottery table is, for example, a table in which a judgment value to be compared with the promotion random number is assigned in advance to one of a judgment result of “promoting” and a judgment result of “do not promote”. The sub CPU 131 determines the presence or absence of the promotion based on which judgment result the promotion random number matches with the judgment value assigned to the judgment result. For example, in the above table, the ratio between the case where the promotion is performed and the case where the promotion is not performed is set in advance so as to be approximately the same.

  By setting in advance in this way, even if the even symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the victory effect, it is possible to expect a certain change hit, so motivation to have a sense of expectation for the re-fluctuation effect after the victory effect is played. It is possible to give to the person.

  When it is determined as YES in the process of step S1715, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, the decorative symbol 501 to be temporarily stopped at the start of the victory effect from the even symbols (step S1716). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a jackpot temporary stop symbol lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table and the jackpot temporary stop symbol random number acquired in the process of step S1716, an even symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is determined.

  In the jackpot temporary stop symbol lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the jackpot temporary stop symbol random number is assigned in advance to the determination result corresponding to any of the symbols 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols. It is a table. The sub CPU 131 determines an even symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed based on which determination result the temporary stop symbol random number for jackpot matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, all symbols are set in advance so as to be determined at the same ratio.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1713, the sub CPU 131 determines the decorative symbol 501 to be stop-displayed in a symbol-aligned manner as any one of the even-numbered symbols (step S1717). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a large hit stop symbol lottery table (not shown) in the sub RAM 133. Then, referring to the portion corresponding to the case where the even symbols are aligned in the table, the even symbols to be stop-displayed are determined based on which determination result the hit symbol random number for jackpot matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result. I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the case of saving time, even symbols are always stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the case of the variation effect pattern related to the resurrection hit, the sub CPU 131 determines a reach loss eye to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the loss notification. Specifically, when the determination in step S1715 is NO, when the processing in step S1716 is performed, or when the processing in step S1717 is performed, the symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed with the start of the victory effect is lost. During the notification, the decorative symbol 501 corresponding to a number obtained by subtracting (or adding) a predetermined value (for example, 1) from the number indicated by the symbol is determined and temporarily stopped and displayed during the loss notification. The decorative pattern 501B is determined.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1712, that is, in the case of a loss, the sub CPU 131 determines, for example, whether the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a reach effect ( Step S1718). If it is determined as YES in the process of step S1718, the sub CPU 131 determines a combination of the reach-losing-eye decorative symbols 501 (step S1719).

  For example, in the sub-ROM 132, a reach-losing table (not shown) in which determination values for comparison with the reach-losing decorative symbol random numbers acquired in the process of step S1711 are assigned to one to nine symbols is stored in advance. . The sub-CPU 131 refers to the reach-losing table (not shown) and determines a decorative symbol to which a determination value that matches the value of the reach-losing decorative symbol random number is assigned as a reach symbol constituting the reach-losing eye. Then, for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to a numeral obtained by subtracting (or adding) a predetermined value (for example, 1) from the numeral indicated by the decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol is determined as the middle decorative symbol 501B constituting the reach loss eye. Thereby, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the losing notification based on the reach losing eyes is realized.

  In the reach loss table, for example, by reducing the number of determination values assigned to the seven symbols, the ratio at which the seven symbols are determined as the reach symbols constituting the reach loss eyes is relatively low. It may be set in advance. Alternatively, by equalizing the number of determination values assigned to each of the 1 to 9 symbols, any of the 1 to 9 symbols is determined as a reach symbol constituting the reach loss eye. The ratio may be set in advance so as to be the same.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1718, the sub CPU 131 determines a combination of the decorative symbols 501 of the rose-shaped (step S1720). For example, in the sub-ROM 132, the judgment value for comparison with the left decorative symbol random number acquired in the process of step S1711 is compared with the left symbol table allocated to 1 symbol to 9 symbols and the right decorative symbol random number. The right symbol table in which the judgment values of the symbols are assigned to 1 to 9 symbols, and the middle symbol table in which the judgment values for comparing with the medium decorative symbol random numbers are assigned to 1 symbol to 9 symbols are stored in advance. (Not shown). The sub CPU 131 refers to these tables, and matches the decorative pattern assigned with the determination value matching the left decorative symbol random number with the left decorative symbol 501A and the right decorative symbol random number so as not to become the symbol alignment and the reach loss. The decorative design to which the determination value is assigned is determined as the right decorative design 501C, and the decorative design to which the determination value corresponding to the medium decorative design random number is allocated is the medium decorative design 501B.

  The random number for determining the temporary stop display and the decorative symbol 501 (and the small symbol 502) to be stopped and displayed is not limited, and may be determined using, for example, a variable effect pattern random number.

[Announcement effect pattern determination processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern determination process in step S160 in FIG. In the process illustrated in FIG. 43, the presence / absence of execution of various announcement effects and the content of the effect in the case of execution are determined. In the following description with reference to FIG. 43, only the cut-in effect, the button effect, the icon change effect, and the icon change effect (gase) are described, and the description of the mini-character effect and the pseudo continuous effect is omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 131 generates an effect control random number for determining setting information of each notice effect such as a cut-in effect, a button effect, the icon change effect, and the icon change effect (gase). It is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1811). Specifically, for example, the sub CPU 131 executes a cut-in effect mode random number, a button effect mode random number, the icon change effect execution random number / mode random number / timing random number, and the icon change effect (gase) execution random number / mode. A random number and an icon change effect (gase) timing random number are acquired.

  The cut-in effect mode random number is a random number for determining a cut-in effect mode. The button effect mode random number is a random number for determining a button effect mode. The execution random number for the icon change effect, the mode random number, and the timing random number are respectively a random number for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, a random number for determining the mode of the icon change effect, and the execution of the icon change effect. This is a random number for determining the timing. The execution random number / mode random number for the icon change effect (gase) is a random number for determining whether or not the icon change effect (gase) is to be executed, and a random number for determining the mode of the icon change effect (gase), respectively. It is a random number. The timing random number for icon change effect (gasse) is a random number for determining the execution timing of the icon change effect (gasse) or the reserved icon change effect (gasse).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1811, the sub CPU 131 acquires the timing random number for holding icon change effect (one of the effect control random numbers) and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1812). This random number is a random number for determining at what timing during the fluctuating effect started this time the pending icon change effect is executed.

  Note that the timing of acquiring the various random numbers acquired in the processes of step S1811 and step S1812 is not limited to the above. For example, when a variation start command is received from the game control board 100 (immediately before execution of step S151), At the time of acquisition (at the time of execution of step S151), etc. Alternatively, a random effect pattern random number may be used for a random number lottery for determining a mode of each announcement effect.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1812, the sub CPU 131 determines whether the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S158 is a variable effect pattern that can execute the SPSP Reach 1 (step S1813). When it is determined as YES in the process of step S1813, the sub CPU 131 determines by lottery whether or not the mode of the cut-in effect performed during the SPSP reach 1 (during the battle) is the premium cut-in. The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a cut-in mode lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the variation effect pattern, and the cut-in effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1811, it is determined whether or not the cut-in effect mode is the premium cut-in.

  In the cut-in mode lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the cut-in effect mode random number is assigned in advance to one of the determination result of “Premier cut-in” and the determination result of “other than premier cut-in”. Table. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the premier cut-in based on whether the cut-in effect mode random number matches the determination value assigned to which determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect of each mode is executed at a rate illustrated in FIG. For example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value to be compared with the cut-in effect form random number, the determination result of “Premier cut-in” is “ "0, 1" (decision ratio 2%), and "2-99" are assigned to the determination result of "other than premier cut-in" (premier cut-in execution ratio 2%). In addition, “0” is assigned to the judgment result of “Premier cut-in” corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern per resurrection (decision ratio 1%), and the judgment result of “other than Premier cut-in” On the other hand, “1 to 99” are assigned (the execution rate of the premium cut-in is 1%). In addition, a judgment value is not assigned to the judgment result of “Premier cut-in” corresponding to the loss effect variation production pattern, and “0 to 99” is set to the judgment result of “Other than premier cut-in”. (Execution ratio of the premium cut-in is 0%). In the present embodiment, when the mode of the cut-in effect is determined to be other than the premium cut-in, the cut-in effect is determined to be a mode corresponding to the variable effect pattern.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1814, the sub CPU 131 determines a button effect mode by lottery. The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, a button mode lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, a button effect mode is determined based on the table, the variable effect pattern, and the button effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1811.

  In the button mode lottery table, for example, the determination value to be compared with the button production mode random number is one of three determination results of “weak button effect”, “strong button effect”, and “premier button effect” Is a table assigned in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the premier cut-in based on which determination result the button effect mode random number matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the button effects of the respective modes are determined at the rates illustrated in FIG. As an example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value to be compared with the button rendering mode random number, the determination result of “weak button rendering” is “ "0-45" (decision ratio 46%), and "47-97" for the determination result of "strong button effect" (decision ratio 52%), "Premier button effect" "98, 99" is assigned to the determination result (determination ratio 2%). In addition, corresponding to the variation production pattern per resurrection and the variation production pattern for the loss, the ratios illustrated in the columns of “Resurrection per battle” and “Defeat in battle (reach loss)” in FIG. A determination value is assigned to each determination result.

  When the process of step S1815 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in the process of step S1813, the sub CPU 131 performs, for example, the holding icon change effect by executing the process of step S1317 (see FIG. 40) in the sub RAM 133. It is determined whether or not the setting information is stored (step S1816). If NO is determined in the process of step S1816, the process proceeds to step S1819.

  If it is determined as YES in the process of step S1816, the sub CPU 131 subtracts 1 from the value of the change number counter and determines the execution timing of the reserved icon change effect by lottery (steps S1817 and S1818). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon change timing lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, based on the table, the fluctuating effect pattern, and the timing random number for holding icon change effect acquired in the process of step S1811, the hold icon related to the prefetch target is changed to a mode indicated by the setting information of the hold icon change effect. The execution timing of the pending icon change effect is determined.

  In the icon change timing lottery table, for example, one or a plurality of timings at which an icon change effect can be executed corresponding to each variable effect pattern are predetermined (for example, see FIG. 30). Then, a determination value to be compared with the reserved icon change effect timing random number is assigned to any of the timings in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines the execution timing of the holding icon change effect based on which of the determination results the random number matches the timing assigned to. When executing the processing in step S1818, the sub CPU 131 advances the processing to step S161.

  If NO is determined in the step S1816, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (step S1819). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, the icon change effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the table, the information on whether or not the icon is a jackpot, and the icon change effect execution random number acquired in the process of step S1811.

  The icon change effect execution lottery table is, for example, the judgment value compared with the icon change effect execution random number is one of the judgment result of “execute” the icon change effect and the judgment result of “not execute”. It is a table assigned to any of them in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on which of the determination values the execution random number for icon change effect matches with the determination value assigned to the determination result.

  For example, when “0 to 99” is set as a determination value to be compared with the execution random number for the icon change effect, the determination value to be compared in the case of the big hit is determined with respect to the determination result of “execute”. “0-39” is assigned (40% for execution), and “40-99” is assigned for the determination result of “not executed” (60% for non-execution). On the other hand, as a determination value to be compared in the case of loss, “0 to 29” is assigned to the determination result of “execute” (percentage of execution is 30%), and the determination result of “do not execute” "30-99" is assigned to the user (a non-execution ratio of 70%).

  As described above, since the icon change effect is easier to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a losing, if the reliability is higher when the icon change effect is executed than when it is not executed, Can recognize.

  If YES is determined in the process of step S1819, the sub CPU 131 determines the final mode of the icon and its change pattern (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “change pattern”) (steps S1820 and S1821). . The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, an icon mode determination table (not shown) for the icon stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, the change pattern of the icon is determined based on the table, the change effect pattern, and the icon change effect mode random number acquired in the process of step S1811, and is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect. I do. An example of the determination ratio is as described above with reference to FIG. When executing the processing in step S1821, the sub CPU 131 advances the processing to step S161.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1819, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase) (step S1822). The sub CPU 131 sets the icon change effect (gase) execution lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133, for example. Then, based on the table, the information on the jackpot or not, and the icon change effect (gase) execution random number acquired in the process of step S1811, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase). decide.

  The icon change effect (gasse) execution lottery table includes, for example, a judgment result indicating that the judgment value to be compared with the icon change effect (gasse) execution random number indicates that the icon change effect (gasse) is “executed” and “execute” This table is pre-assigned to any of the determination results of “No”. The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (gase) based on which of the determination results the icon change effect (gase) execution random number matches with the determination value assigned to the determination result. For example, the icon change effect (gase) is set in advance so that it is more difficult to execute when a big hit is made than when a loss is made. Thereby, the player can recognize that the reliability is lower when the icon change effect (gase) is executed than when it is not executed.

  If YES is determined in the process of step S1822, the sub CPU 131 determines by lottery which icon change effect (gase) indicating a change to which mode is to be executed (step S1824). The sub CPU 131 sets, for example, the icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance in the sub RAM 133. Then, the mode of the icon change effect (gase) is determined based on the table, the information on whether or not the icon is a big hit, and the random number for the icon change effect (gase) obtained in the process of step S1811.

  In the icon change effect (gase) mode lottery table, for example, the judgment values to be compared with the icon change effect (gase) mode random numbers are three determination results of “blue”, “green”, and “red”. Are tables which are respectively assigned in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines the mode of the icon change effect (gase) based on which of the determination results the random number corresponding to the icon change effect (gase) matches with the determination value assigned to which determination result. For example, in the above table, it is set in advance that the loss is more likely to be determined to be blue and hard to be determined to be green and red than the case of a big hit.

  If NO is determined in the process of step S1822, the sub CPU 131 determines whether the setting information of the hold icon change effect (gase) is stored by executing the process of step S1320 (see FIG. 40). (Step S1823). If the determination in step S1823 is YES, and if the process in step S1824 has been executed, the sub CPU 131 sets an icon change timing lottery table (not shown) in the sub RAM 133, and stores the icon change timing lottery table and the fluctuation effect pattern. The execution timing of the icon change effect (gasse) or the reserved icon change effect (gasse) is determined based on the icon change effect (gasse) timing random number acquired in the process of step S1811.

  If the process in step S1825 has been executed, or if the determination in step S1823 is NO, the sub CPU 131 advances the process to step S161.

  Note that the process illustrated in FIG. 43 is merely an example, and any method may be used to determine the mode of the notice effect. For example, the mode of each announcement effect may be determined by one random lottery.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the image audio control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 44 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during a normal operation except for a special case such as a power-on or a power-off. I do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 determines whether or not the variable presentation start command transmitted from the presentation control board 130 in accordance with the processing of step S161 (see FIG. 41) has been received (step S501).

  When it is determined that the fluctuation effect start command has been received (step S501: YES), the overall CPU 141 based on the setting information on the fluctuation effect included in the received fluctuation effect start command and the program stored in the control ROM 142. The control unit generates a control signal, and outputs the generated control signal to the VDP 144 and the sound DSP 145 to start a variable effect (step S502). In addition, for example, if the command is a variable effect start command instructing execution of a button effect, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information (execution period, etc. of the effect button 26) relating to execution in the control RAM 145.

  When executing the process of step S502 or determining that the variable production start command has not been received (step S501: NO), the general CPU 141 receives the variable production end command transmitted from the production control board 130. It is determined whether or not it is (step S503). When the overall CPU 141 determines that the fluctuation effect ending command has been received (step S503: YES), the fluctuation effect ends (step S504).

  When executing the process of step S504 or determining that the variable effect end command has not been received (step S503: NO), the central CPU 141 determines whether or not the button effect is being performed (step S505).

  When it is determined as YES in the process of step S505, the general CPU 141 determines whether or not the operation effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S506). If it is determined that the operation effect start command has not been received (step S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S509.

  When it is determined that the operation effect start command has been received (step S506: YES), for example, the overall CPU 141 uses the effect control board 130 in the loss suggestion and hit operation effects described with reference to FIG. At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol 501, one of the effects determined to be executed in advance is executed (step S507). Thus, for example, a process in which a hit action effect is executed in accordance with an operation during the premium button effect is realized.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in the process of step S505, the central CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the button effect (step S508). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (step S508: YES), the process proceeds to step S507. This implements a process of executing a winning action effect in response to the end of the valid period without the operation of the effect button 26 during the valid period of the premium button effect.

  When executing the process of step S507, when determining that the process of step S506 is NO, and when determining that the process of step S508 is NO, the general CPU 141 determines whether the icon display command transmitted from the effect control board 130 is received. It is determined whether or not it is (step S509). When determining that the icon display command has been received (step S509: YES), the supervisor CPU 141 sets the icon display control setting information included in the command, such as the icon change effect setting information, in the control RAM 145, and sets the setting. The icon display control based on the information is executed (Step S510, Step S511).

  When executing the process of step S511 or determining that the icon display command has not been received (step S509: NO), the central CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S509). Specifically, the supervisory CPU 141 transmits data relating to the image and sound control performed in the image and sound control board 140 to the effect control board 130.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are illuminated by the lamp control board 150, and the staging part 7 is operated in synchronization with the staging performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Timer interrupt processing by lamp control board 150]
Next, a timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control board 150. The lamp control board 150 transmits a command from the effect control board 130 and a signal from the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130 during a normal operation except for a special case such as a start of power supply or a power off. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 45 is repeatedly executed at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the data relating to the performed image and sound control.

  The lamp CPU 151 first receives data related to the image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130 and data (for example, an operation and effect start command) transmitted from the effect control board 130. The processing is executed (Step S601). Subsequently, the lamp CPU 151 sets the light emission pattern and the operation pattern specified by the data received in the processing of step S601 in the lamp RAM 153 (step S602), and executes the light emission control and the operation control based on the pattern (step S603). ).

  Subsequent to the process of step S603, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the effect button 26 has been operated (step S604). If it is determined that the operation has not been performed (step S604: NO), the lamp CPU 151 ends the processing illustrated in FIG.

  If it is determined that the effect button 26 has been operated (step S604: YES), the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated to the effect control board 130 (step S605), and as shown in FIG. The process ends.

[Modification]
The present invention relates to, for example, a gaming machine of a type that shifts to a certain-variable gaming state immediately after the end of a jackpot game without a V-prize during a jackpot game, a mixed-type gaming machine, a spinning-type gaming machine, and a slot machine. Etc. can also be applied to other gaming machines.

  Note that any input means may be used. As the input means, for example, a touch panel, which is a display screen on which a player can input operation information by performing a touch operation with a finger, may be provided. Further, an optical sensor or the like provided on the frame member 3 may be used as the input means so that the player can input operation information by performing a touch operation on the glass plate.

  It is to be noted that the effect control board 130 is caused to execute a part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150, or a part of the processing executed in the effect sound control board 130 is executed. Alternatively, the control may be performed by the lamp control board 150. Further, any one of the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be integrally formed. As an example, processing executed in the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 150 May be executed by one control board.

  Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the light emission mode and operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations, light emission mode, and operation mode. No. In addition, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, and the like in the above-described flowcharts are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The illustrations and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be other modes.

  Note that the above-described effects are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Further, the above-described embodiment and modified examples are applicable to each other, and the present invention may be realized in various combinations.

[Structure and operation effect of pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment may have the following configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, 1) according to one embodiment
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
During the fluctuation display of the symbol, it is possible to cause a predetermined rendering means (for example, 5) to execute a notification effect (for example, display of a premium cut-in image) for notifying that the special game is executed,
At the start of the notification effect, a light emission effect of causing the light-emitting means to emit light of a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) is started, and after the notification effect is ended, the light emission effect is ended.

  According to this configuration, a light emission effect in which the light emitting unit emits light with a specific light emission color is started with the start of the notification effect. By making the execution time longer in the light emission effect than in the notification effect, the light emission effect is continued even after the notification effect ends. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification effect has started by making the light emitting means emit light in a specific light emission color, thereby giving a powerful effect at the start of the notification effect.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Effect sound output means (for example, 24) capable of outputting effect sound, image display means (for example, 5) for displaying an image,
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
During the fluctuation display of the symbol, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies that the special game is executed,
The notification effect,
A first notification effect that outputs a specific effect sound from the effect sound output unit (for example, an output of a premium cut-in sound);
A second notification effect (for example, display of a premium cut-in image) for displaying a specific effect image on the image display means,
With the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) is started, and after the first notification effect is finished, the light emission effect is started. The two-information effect is ended, and then the light-emitting effect is ended.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the light emission effect with the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect. In addition, by extending the execution time of each effect in the order of the execution time of the first notification effect <the execution time of the second notification effect <the execution time of the light emission effect, the end timing of each effect can be made different. Accordingly, it is possible to give a powerful impression at the start of the first notification effect and the second notification effect, and it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification effect has been executed. In addition, since the light emission effect is continued even after the first notification effect and the second notification effect are finished, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the first notification effect and the second notification effect have been executed. It is.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
Light-emitting means (for example, 25A, 25B) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors;
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
During the fluctuation display of the symbol, a notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed (for example, display of a rainbow effect image of the premier character D in the icon change effect indicating the change to the premiere). It is possible to cause predetermined effect means (for example, 5) to execute,
With the start of the notification effect, a light emission effect (e.g., 25A, 25B iridescent light emission in the icon change effect indicating the change to the premiere) that causes the light emitting means to emit a specific light emission color is started, and the light emission is performed. After the effect ends, the notification effect ends.

  According to this configuration, a light emission effect in which the light emitting unit emits light with a specific light emission color is started with the start of the notification effect. By making the execution time longer in the notification effect than in the light emission effect, the notification effect is continued even after the light emission effect ends. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification effect has been performed by starting the notification effect by causing the light emitting means to emit light of a specific light emission color.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
Light-emitting means (for example, 25A, 25B) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors;
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
Prior to the determination by the determination unit, a preliminary determination unit (for example, S2109, S2209) that determines in advance whether to execute the special game based on the game information,
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
A notification effect (e.g., a premier character D in a hold icon change effect indicating a change to a premium) indicating that the special game has been determined to be executed by the pre-determination means over a plurality of variable display of the symbols. (Display of a rainbow effect image according to the above) can be executed by a predetermined effect means (for example, 5),
With the start of the notification effect, a light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color (for example, iridescent light emission of 25A and 25B in a holding icon change effect indicating a change to a premium) is started, and the light emission is performed. After the effect ends, the notification effect ends.

  According to such a configuration, before the symbol change display is started, a light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color is started with the start of the notification effect. By making the execution time longer in the notification effect than in the light emission effect, the notification effect is continued even after the light emission effect ends. This makes it easier for the player to grasp that the notification effect has been performed by starting the notification effect by causing the light emitting means to emit a specific light emission color before the symbol change display is started. It is possible.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
A reach effect (for example, SPSP reach) that expects the special game to be executed can be executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol,
During the fluctuation display of the symbol, it is possible to cause a predetermined rendering means (for example, 5) to execute a notification effect (for example, display of a premium cut-in image) for notifying that the special game is executed,
During the reach effect, the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined light emission color (for example, other than rainbow color) corresponding to the reach effect,
When the notification effect is performed during the reach effect, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light with a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) different from the predetermined light emission color at the start of the notification effect (for example, 25A). , 25B, and 37A to 37C emit light in rainbow colors.).

  According to such a configuration, during the reach effect, the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined light emission color in accordance with the reach effect, so that the effect of the reach effect can be improved. Then, when the notification effect is executed during the reach effect, the light emission control corresponding to the information effect is prioritized, so that the information effect can be emphasized rather than the reach effect. In addition, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game by a synergistic effect of the reach effect and the notification effect.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
A movable body (for example, 7);
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
As the notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol, a first notification effect (for example, display of the button image 51 relating to the premium button effect) and the first notification effect are A second notification effect (for example, an operation of the directing effect 7 relating to the hit operation effect) which is a different effect and operates the movable body, can be executed once each with a different execution timing,
A light emission effect (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A-C rainbow light emission) for causing the light emitting means to emit light of a specific light emission color (for example, rainbow color) can be executed.
A light-emitting effect is executed in accordance with the first notification effect, and a light-emitting effect is executed in accordance with the second notification effect.

  According to this configuration, the first notification effect and the second notification effect can be executed once each during one symbol change display, while the light emission effect can be executed a plurality of times. In addition, the light-emitting effect is executed along with both the first notification effect and the second notification effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a relationship between the first notification effect and the second notification effect that are executed only once during one symbol change display.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
A movable body (for example, 7);
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Input means (for example, 26) that can be input by the player;
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
A first notification effect (for example, display of a button image 51 relating to a premium button effect) for prompting a player to perform an input to the input means as a notification effect notifying that the special game is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol. ) And a second notification effect for operating the movable body (for example, the operation of the effect character 7 related to the hit operation effect), and
A light emission effect (for example, iridescent light emission of 25A, 25B, 37A-C) for causing the light emitting means to emit light of a specific light emission color can be executed,
A light emitting effect can be executed during the first notification effect, and a light emitting effect can be executed during the second notification effect,
When the second notification effect is executed after the first notification effect is executed, the light emission effect is started with the start of the first notification effect, and the light emission effect is continuously performed until the second notification effect is performed. I do.

  According to such a configuration, a light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit a specific light emission color is executed at the start of the first notification effect, and the light emission effect is continued during the first notification effect and the second notification effect. Can be executed. This makes it possible to provide continuity and association between the first notification effect and the second notification effect using different effect means.

Also, the gaming machine (for example, 1)
A movable body (for example, 7);
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, 25A, 25B, 37A to 37C);
Input means (for example, 26) that can be input by the player;
Determining means (for example, S309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means (for example, S21, S22);
A special game execution means (for example, S6) for executing the special game when the judgment means judges to execute the special game;
A symbol control unit (for example, S3) for notifying the determination result of the determination unit by stopping and displaying the symbol (for example, a special symbol) after variably displaying the symbol;
Effect control means (for example, 130, 140, 150) for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
A first notification effect (for example, display of a button image 51 relating to a premium button effect) for prompting a player to perform an input to the input means as a notification effect notifying that the special game is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol. ) And a second notification effect for operating the movable body (for example, the operation of the effect character 7 related to the hit operation effect), and
A light emission effect (for example, iridescent light emission of 25A, 25B, 37A-C) for causing the light emitting means to emit light of a specific light emission color can be executed,
When the second notification effect is performed after the first notification effect is performed, the light emission effect is started with the start of the first notification effect, and the light emission effect is started with the start of the second notification effect. .

  According to this configuration, the light-emitting effect can be executed at the timing when both the first notification effect and the second notification effect are started. Thereby, it is possible to give a relation between the first notification effect and the second notification effect using different effect means.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Gaming machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 11 1st starting port 25 Board lamp 26 Effect button 262 Button lamp 37 Frame lamp 38 Starting port lamp 100 Game control board 101 CPU
102 ROM
103 RAM
130 Production control board 131 CPU
132 ROM
133 RAM
140 Image and sound control board 150 Lamp control board

Claims (1)

With a movable body,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game based on the game information obtained by the obtaining means,
A special game execution means for executing the special game when it is determined by the judgment means to execute the special game;
Symbol control means for notifying the determination result of the determination means by stopping and displaying after the symbols are variably displayed,
Effect control means for controlling the effect,
The effect control means,
A first notification effect and a second notification effect for operating the movable body, which are different from the first notification effect, as the notification effects for notifying that the special game is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol. Can be executed once each with a different execution timing.
A light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light with a specific light emission color can be executed,
A gaming machine that executes a light-emitting effect along with the first notification effect, and executes a light-emitting effect along with the second notification effect.

Images